JP7233062B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine to which a decoration board on which light emitters are mounted is attached (for example, Patent Literature 1). The player is provided with a variety of performances using the lighting performance by such light emitters.

JP 2016-154676 A (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)

However, it has been difficult to further improve convenience with the same game machine configuration as the conventional one.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its object is to further improve convenience.

The present invention
a storage unit provided in the upper part of the back side of the game machine and having a storage area capable of storing game balls supplied from the island facility;
A predetermined ball payout device is provided on the right side of the storage area when viewed from the back of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the storage area pass through a rear guide path behind the game machine from the storage section. a tank rail part that can be guided in a direction to be
an inclined portion located outside the storage area and above the tank rail portion;
The inclined portion is provided integrally with a member constituting the storage portion, and the upper surface is inclined so that a game ball positioned on the upper surface of the inclined portion can flow into the tank rail portion due to a predetermined event. It is considered to be a face,
The inclined surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction in which the rear guide path is located, not in the direction in which the storage area is located, so that game balls flowing down the inclined surface do not flow into the storage area. become,
Furthermore, the inclined surface has a surface inclined downward from the front side to the rear side of the game machine ,
Furthermore, the downstream end of the inclined surface is open without a vertical wall so that the game ball that has flowed down the inclined surface does not stay.
It is characterized by
Also, a storage unit provided in the upper part of the back side of the game machine and having a storage area capable of storing game balls supplied from the island facility;
A predetermined payout device is provided on the right side of the storage area when viewed from the back of the gaming machine, and guides game balls stored in the storage area through a rear guidance path behind the gaming machine from the storage unit. a tank rail portion that can be guided in the direction of
an inclined portion located outside the storage area and above the tank rail portion;
The inclined portion is provided integrally with a member constituting the storage portion, and the upper surface is inclined so that a game ball positioned on the upper surface of the inclined portion can flow into the tank rail portion due to a predetermined event. It is considered to be a face,
A regulating wall is provided on the left side of the inclined portion in a rear view of the gaming machine for regulating the inflow of game balls into the storage area so that the game balls flowing down the inclined surface do not flow into the storage area,
Further, the inclined surface has a surface inclined downward from the front side to the rear side of the gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a body frame and the body frame is opened from an outer frame; FIG. Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame, showing another form. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. FIG. 38(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX. FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; (a) is a vertical cross-sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view of the same. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another tampering prevention means; (a) and (b) are enlarged views of essential parts of FIG. 45 showing the normal flow of game balls (foul balls), and (c) is an enlarged view of essential parts of FIG. . FIG. 4 is a plan view of the foul cover unit; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another tampering prevention means; (a) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a foul ball passes. 49(a) and 49(b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line is disabled. (a) and (b) show a state in which the operation line disabling member is motorized, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z section in FIG. 49 showing the state in which the operation line is disabled. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a main part showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 4 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational positions of the dispensing blades; It is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball dropout prevention. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 119(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side; FIG. 117(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 117(a). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate on the game board. It is a front view of the center accessory and the display effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is a side cross-sectional view of the display effect unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right along with the center accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a display effect unit, and the reflective recessed part of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a surface light-guide plate. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the display effect unit is illuminated; It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decorative body in the lower movable effect unit is illuminated. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower center elevating base is lifted in the lower movable production unit and the lower front center decoration and the lower rear center decoration are illuminated. Lower center elevating base, lower left side elevating base, and lower right side elevating base are lifted in the lower movable production unit to light up the lower front center decoration, lower rear center decoration, lower left side decoration, and lower right side decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it has been opened. FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 139 and the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; The four rotary decorations, the left side rotary decoration, the left subside rotary decoration, the right side rotary decoration, and the right subside rotary decoration are each unfolded in the lower movable production unit to schematically show the decoration of each surface. It is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitting-displayed in a lower movable production|presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the drive mechanism of an upper back movable production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper back movable production|presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper front movable decoration of an upper front movable production|presentation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view along line XX of FIG. 150; FIG. 151 is a view in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 150; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the structure of a frame ground substrate; 2 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply substrate; FIG. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 157 is a view in the direction of arrow B of FIG. 156; Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 1). Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 2). FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits; It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. 164 is an enlarged view of part D in FIG. 163 viewed from the non-LED-mounted surface; FIG. It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the third embodiment. FIG. 167 is an enlarged view of the D′ portion of FIG. 165 or the D″ portion of FIG. 166 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface; It is a modified example of the dispensing device. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of a modification of the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate; 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 106) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. Main body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, and a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. , a ball launching device 540 for hitting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game balls B supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the back of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501. A back cover 640 for covering the sides, a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 are arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a peripheral control unit 1500 configured as a transparent substrate box arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and on the back side of the performance display device 1600, and a game. A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 that provide a predetermined number of game balls B), It has The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The general winning opening 2001 , the first starting opening 2002 , the gate section 2003 , the second starting opening 2004 , the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, the second big winning hole 2006, etc. in the game area 5a, The player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the display effect unit 2600, and the lower movable effect according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be used to perform movable effects and light emitting effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 22(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 22(a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected by the ball launcher 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. FIG. 32(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 32(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101 a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 99). and FIG. 100) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1-7. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1-9. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 23, etc.).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. FIG. 35(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 35(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 36(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition portion 143a (waiting position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Then, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 36(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be fed (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 153) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 36(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An operating wire disabling member 700, which is a first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b so as to be accommodated therein. The operating wire disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. there is In addition, disabling the operation wire here means that the operation wire cannot be operated normally by cutting, pinching (pinching), entangling (winding up), or gluing with hot melt etc. It means to put into a state.

The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A first piece is vertically separated at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance to the left from the right side. A portion 701 and a second piece portion 702, and an inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. and have. The first piece portion 701 of the operation wire disabling member 700 is bent with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation wire disabling member 700 so that the right end in front view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece portion 702 extends on the same plane as the flat plate surface of the operating wire disabling member 700 . As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that widens in a V shape toward the right.

The operating wire disabling member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is positioned inside the ball supply port 142a. communicated with.

According to this operating wire nullifying member 700, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball having a diameter approximately the same as that of a game ball) to which a flexible string-like operating wire (string, piano wire, wire or linear member such as a catheter) is attached. or a synthetic resin ball of approximately the same diameter) is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out on the side of the upper tray 201 attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball path using an illegal ball, or an illegal act such as taking an illegal ball into or out of the first starting port 2002 is performed, the game is played by the ball launching device 540. By the force of the illegal ball fired (hit ball) with a strength that can reach the area 5a, the operating wire attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702. Then, the narrowed portion of the shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 can be cut like scissors, thus invalidating the operating line and using an irregular ball. It is possible to deter fraudulent acts that have been committed.

It should be noted that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the form described above, and may be of another form. For example, if it is configured to deter fraud by cutting or pinching the operating wire attached to the illegal ball, the metal plate may be bent in a form different from that described above, or the bent operating wire nullifying member 700 may be used. Alternatively, a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or pinching the operating wire attached to the irregular ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.

Also, if the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the standby position (above the partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is moved to the non-contact type (for example, the proximity switch ), and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the illegal ball from being shot. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feed solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feed.

[3-1-11. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the cover member removed, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the cover member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) that is weaker than a predetermined force (a firing force that can reach the game area 5a). It is for guiding game balls B (foul balls) that have not reached inside to the lower tray 202, and guiding game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. .

As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and has a lower normal dispensing passage 610a of a lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for balls of the dish unit 200. and a through-ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. and a full tank ball receptacle 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a; A lower plate ball supply port 211c which is open forward near the lower corner and discharges game balls B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving portion 150c forward, and is an opening for balls of the plate unit 200. and a communication passage 150h that connects the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiver 150c. This communication passage 150h is composed of an upper passage wall 150i disposed on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and an upper passage wall 150i which is about one game ball long from the upper passage wall 150i. and a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel with a space of . to open downward.

A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e to the ball discharge port 150d is a foul ball return. A return passageway section 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f is provided with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut (see FIG. 109). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line nullification member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for deterring fraud by an illegal ball Q to which an operation line L is attached. Operation line nullification members 7000H and 7000S, which are third tampering prevention means, are provided in the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between them.

The second operating wire disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is enlarged in FIG. As shown in the figure, the projections 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting hole 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting hole 152h of the cover member 152, and fixed (bonded) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, Furthermore, for safety considerations, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit from the outside so that it is difficult for the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like to come in contact with it.

A specific operating wire disabling member 7000 has components equivalent to those of the operating wire disabling member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. One piece 7010 and a second piece 7020 extending from a convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 form a V-shape opening in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball of the connecting passage 150h. A shearing portion 7000v of is formed.

In the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface and directed toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operating wire nullifying member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k for guiding the operating wire L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and has a folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i facing the lid member 152 side. A first inclined portion 150ka descending toward the operating wire nullifying member 7000 side, and a narrow width toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. and a tapered guiding portion 150k having a tapered second inclined portion 150kb (a shape capable of capturing the operating line L). Then, when the operating line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the irregular ball Q or the pulling from the outside, slides on the guide portion 150k in a winding manner, the tensile force applied to the operating line L moves the first inclined portion 150ka to the second inclined portion 150ka. The operating wire L is guided to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 so as to slide on the inclined portion 150kb. As a result, the operating wire L can be reliably captured by the operating wire disabling member 7000 . In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of normal foul balls and the guidance of the operating wire L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to catch the operating line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be curved.

Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is made using the space communicating from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The installed illegal ball Q is made to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L that is projected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball path using the illegal ball Q, or It is possible to deter fraudulent acts such as putting the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.

For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the illegal ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause it to flow backward and send it to the firing position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter referred to as "fraudulent act"). A”) is played, if the illegal ball Q crosses the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c toward the firing position of the firing rail 544, Pulled by it (loaded with tension), the operating wire L turns around along the folded portion in a U-turn. Then, the operating wire L is guided to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v formed by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally As a result, the operation line L cannot be manipulated, so that fraudulent acts using the illegal ball Q can be deterred.

In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operating line L, and one of them is sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the shooting position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, is used. Even if a cheating act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") of grabbing the operating line L connected to the illegal ball that became a foul ball from the player and shooting the following illegal ball Q into the game area 5a, The operating line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (loaded with tension) by the subsequent launch of the illegal ball Q. L is pressed against the same folded portion, and the operating wire L enters the sheared portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. It becomes possible. 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where fraudulent act B is performed. In addition, with respect to the above-described fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line nullification member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, may not be sufficiently effective against an illegal ball Q that becomes a foul ball (for example, Even if the illegal ball Q is fired with a certain strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means). It also has the effect of For this reason, when the fraudulent act B is targeted, the operation line nullification members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means, and the operation line nullification member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means to be described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and a first operation line disabling member 700 and a second operation line disabling member 7000 or third operation line disabling members 7000H and 7000S separate from it are provided. It is preferable to provide the pachinko machine 1 together. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are provided together on the side of the door frame 3 and are not exposed to the outside, so they are inconspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, anti-fraud information is less likely to be leaked. In addition, since deterioration of the sharpness of the operating wire disabling members 700 and 7000 affects the crime prevention performance, if they are replaced together with the door frame 3, the crime prevention performance can be easily maintained.

By the way, the operating wire nullifying members 700 and 7000 serving as the above-described first and second fraud prevention means cut and invalidate the operating wire L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to make it impossible to push or pull the flexible operation line L, or to make it difficult to push or pull the operation line L, making it impossible to easily operate the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L. You can disable it like this:

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operating line nullifying member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion in the enlarged view of FIG. The front half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the tip is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033 , and the rear half of the non-joint portion is a clamping portion 7044 . Such an operation line disabling member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and furthermore, for safety reasons, the unit main body 151 is designed so that it is difficult for an employee or a game machine assembler to come in contact with the hands. and is covered and housed by a lid member 152 from the outside.

According to the operating wire nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operating wire L is pulled by the illegal ball Q, and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion is turned around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-bonded portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is sandwiched by 7044 like tweezers.

As a result, the illegal ball Q flowing back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the above-described illegal act A reaches the firing position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally fouled due to illegal act B. reaches the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line nullification members 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible control line L is pushed in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of operation line L that is extended cannot be adjusted (illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a cannot be adjusted). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter cheating using the cheating ball Q.

In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joint portion is the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is folded so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the leading end portion of one of the folded plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033 (induction portion ), and the sandwiching portion 7044 may be the narrow width portion of both plate surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while exhibiting the same effect as the fraud prevention effect described above.

Further, the operation line disabling member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is, although not shown, a gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. to form an adhesive portion, and the operating line L guided to the second inclined portion 150kb is adhered to this adhesive portion so that it cannot move.

Further, the operating wire disabling member 7000 for sandwiching the operating wire L consists of two metal plates 7011 and 7022, but is replaced with a coil spring as shown in FIG. It may be installed and formed such that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and the central axis of the guiding portion 150k are substantially perpendicular to each other. The operating wire L guided by the second inclined portion 150kb is fitted and sandwiched between adjacent coils of the coil spring.

Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, while compression coil springs need to be installed in a compressed state. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.

In addition, the coil spring may of course be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. This is preferable because the entry of the operating wire L becomes smoother. In this way, when the operating wire disabling member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) into the above-described operating wire nullifying member 7000, and the guiding portion 150k leading to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 is blocked by the cell plate. Further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in order to deal with this, in the above-described embodiment, the course change portion of the foul ball return passage portion 1014 (in this embodiment, the portion corresponding to the lower tray ball supply port 211c) A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is possible to prevent further fraudulent work in which a foreign object is inserted from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k. In addition, as countermeasures against illegal work, such as inserting a foreign object such as a cell plate from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k, inserting a foreign object such as a cell plate into the slit 1015 as described above. Not limited to the one forming the inlet for taking in, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, a configuration in which a projecting obstruction 1016 is provided to impede the reaching of the guiding portion 150k by colliding foreign matter such as a cell plate or the like. As such, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operating wire disabling members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operating wire L and is disabled. , 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D that actively nullifies the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be employed.

49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of a dynamic operating line disabling member 7000D, the operating line disabling member 7000D having a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). (a corner portion corresponding to just above the lower tray ball supply port 211c) is pivotally attached so as to be able to swing.

49, the operation line disabling member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped disabling portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. A shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation portion 2646 intersects with the invalidation portion 2646, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centering on the shaft hole 2647 protruding to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and the ball receiving posture shown in FIG. It can swing to the release posture. Further, in the operation line disabling member 7000D, a balance weight 2660 is provided on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the disabling portion 2646 with the shaft hole 2647 interposed therebetween. The ball receiving posture of FIG. 50(a) is maintained without external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) acting on the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball acts on the ball receiving portion 2645. 50(b).

In addition, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D forms an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture of FIG. 50(b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball enters the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the above-described dynamic operating line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 50(a). It flows down, and immediately after changing the course downward at the course changing section, it rides on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line disabling member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of this foul ball, the operation line disabling member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 50(b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is released into the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by momentum.

In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may occur at once. is stopped by an arcuate ball stop portion 2648, and after the operating wire disabling member 7000D moves back, processing continues. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls occur at the same time, they can be dealt with one by one without any trouble.

Next, the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D is subjected to the above-described illegal act B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the batted ball supply port 142a. Then, by intentionally shooting the illegal ball weakly, it is turned into a foul ball and taken out from the ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for balls, and the operating line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped to continue the illegal ball. 51(a), the illegal ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, it rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating wire disabling member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 51(b). At this time, the invalidating portion 2646 of the operation wire invalidating member 7000D also rotates, and the intersecting side portion 2651 at the edge thereof traverses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return path, the operating line L also crosses the passage, so the operating line L is caught between the crossing side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operating line L cannot drop, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating line nullification member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line nullifying member 7000D is located at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is inserted through the ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q stopped at this position will be taken out from the outside.

If the operation line L is made to meander between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 so as to make it difficult to reverse the operation line L, the state of being captured by the operation line disabling member 7000D can be prevented. It also becomes difficult to pull back the illegal ball Q toward the batted ball supply port 142a. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining in the operation line nullifying member 7000D can be saved and recovered as an evidence ball.

The above-described dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D utilizes the weight of the illegal ball Q. However, as shown in FIG. good.

52, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric driving means is connected to the portion where the balance weight 2660 is provided, and the sphere detector is connected to the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line nullification member 7000D shifts from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. Also, when a game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence of the game ball to the absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 descends and the operating line The disabling member 7000D moves back from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.

When a normal foul ball rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating wire nullifying member 7000D, the occurrence and release of the foul ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is activated accordingly. In order to operate appropriately, foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the dead weight operating line nullifying member 7000D.

On the other hand, when an illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation wire invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operating wire. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture along with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 of the disabling portion 2646 and the receiving portion 2652, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. , the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 remains in the raised position because the sphere detector 2655 is not signaled to release. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, illegality can be prevented.

Note that the above-described dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D cuts and disables the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and/or the receiving portion 2652 of the disabling portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line disabling member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing an illegal ball Q from entering from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104, It can also be used as reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher anti-fraud function is exhibited.

In addition to the configuration described above, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is an intersection side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the intersection side and passes through the movable area of the intersection side. The illegal ball Q after the ball detection is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidation part, and the operating line L is pinched or cut at the crossing side crossing the connecting passage 150h. good too.

Also, the dynamic operating wire disabling member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operating wire disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. FIG. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operating line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, so that the illegal deterrence effect can be reliably enhanced.

FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operating wire disabling member 7000D, which winds up the operating wire L to disable it.

In other words, the operation line disabling member 7000D has a square ring-shaped disabling portion 2646 mounted in the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about a rotating shaft 2656 perpendicular to the passage. , a motor 2657 serving as an electric drive means for rotating the disabling portion 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the disabling portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 provided downstream from the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. and a ball detector 2655. Each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once.

When a normal foul ball enters the foul cover unit 150 equipped with such an operation line disabling member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the disabling portion 2646, and the ball is detected. When detected by the device 2655, the invalidation part 2646 idles once, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.

On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the operation line nullification member 7000D, the operation line L is also nullified when the illegal ball Q passes through the nullification portion 2646. Since the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation part 2646 rotates once, the operation line L winds around the invalidation part 2646 because it passes through the invalidation part 2646 . Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stays within the connecting passage 150h, there is no possibility that it will fall into the wrong hands.

The ball detector 2655 for detecting the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operating line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless idle rotation of the operation wire disabling member 7000D for winding the operation wire L can be eliminated.

The above description of the embodiments relating to the dynamic operating line disabling member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball shooting device for shooting game balls;
a shooting passage portion forming a shot ball passage that communicates with the game area from the shooting position of the ball shooting device;
a return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the shot ball passage and a ball opening for releasing game balls to the outside in front of the machine;
a fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation from the front of the operating line attached to the fraudulent ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation wire invalidation member that invalidates the operation wire by pinching, cutting, or winding the operation wire,
The operation line nullifying member has an intersecting side portion crossing the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersecting side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersecting side portion to operate the foul ball. A game machine characterized in that the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is made to cross the return passage, and the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the crossing side to be invalidated. ”

10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third tamper-proof means provided at the above-described foul ball drop opening 1013 is provided at the end (terminal end) of the launch rail 544. part) and an operation line disabling member 7000S provided at the end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, the rail base 1001x made of resin).

The operating wire nullifying member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is formed into a comb-like shape so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. are covered with safety cover portions 1017 arranged in rows. Note that the cutting blade is supported by this safety cover portion 1017 .

Therefore, as described above, a fraudulent act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate into the return passage portion 1014 to cause it to flow backward and send it to the firing position of the ball launching device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls toward the firing position due to the inclination, it pulls (tension is applied) and the operating line L becomes the operating line nullifying member. It is cut by touching the cutting edge of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operating line L, one of which is sent to the shooting position from the batted ball supply port 142a, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening. Even when the illegal act B of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q and shooting the subsequent illegal ball Q into the game area 5a is performed, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage part 1014 is returned. Since the operating wire L touches the cutting blade of the operating wire disabling member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 is composed of a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape. Protruding.

According to this operation line nullification member 7000S, if an illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is connected to the lower dish ball supply port which is the opening for balls. 211c, when the operating line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the tension causes the operating line L to pull the wires of the operating line nullifying member 7000S. Therefore, even if the force of the hand manipulating the operating wire L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operating wire L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire members of the operating wire nullifying member 7000S. The movement of the hand loosened from the ball is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. In other words, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, fraudulent actions using the illegal ball Q can be deterred.

As described above, the third fraud prevention means is such that the operation line disabling member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side is effective in the early stages of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the side operation line invalidating member 7000S exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

Of course, it is possible to use either one of the operation line nullification members 7000H and 7000S alone, and specific nullification members for the operation line nullification member 7000H and the operation line nullification member 7000S are also implemented. The forms may be interchanged, or the same disabling member may be employed.

In addition to the case where the operation line disabling members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in the embodiment, for example, the metal plate that constitutes the firing rail 544 may be appropriately processed to disable the operation line. Alternatively, a wire rod may be integrally formed with the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a V-shaped groove may be formed at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The clamping portion 7000Sv may be engraved to guide and clamp the operating wire L into the groove of the clamping portion 7000Sv.

Furthermore, the operating wire nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operating wire nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 is provided with a guiding portion 150k composed of a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb.

As described above, the embodiment in which the second operation line disabling member 7000 for disabling the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop opening 1013 has been described, the present invention is of course not limited to the embodiment described above.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operating wire disabling member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. The wire nullifying member 7000 may be provided at the exit portion of the communication passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 39), or may be provided at the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. The operation line L is provided at the beginning of the rail 1001 and at the end of the launch rail 544, respectively, so that the operation line L is bent in contact with a part of the return passage 1014, and the operation line L is affected by the weight of the illegal ball Q, etc. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is pulled straight by an unauthorized person. In addition, the installation position of the operation line disabling member 7000 of the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if the fingertip is inserted from the ball opening. This is preferable from the viewpoint of crime prevention, which makes it difficult to illegally manipulate the member 7000 itself.

In addition, in the embodiment, the operating wire disabling member 7000 is provided on one side of the connecting passage 150h. A cutting blade may be arranged. 44(a) and 44(b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the beginning portion of the connecting passage 150h are formed into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017 so that the cutting edge of the cutting blade is are designed not to be touched. In this case, the cutting blade of the operating wire disabling member 7000 has a well-known folded blade structure or tip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and is connected to the unit main body 151. A loading port 1019 and a discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blades are pushed out in a rolling manner so that they can be replaced with new ones. 44(a) and 44(b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a clipping split line portion for the operation line L which is cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L can bite into the clip split line portion 1021. It's like Therefore, even if the operating wire disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operating wire L, the operating wire L can bite into the pinching split line portion 1021 of the bottom wall 150g or the like, so that fraud prevention is assured. improves.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a foul ball is returned to the lower tray has been shown, but there are also gaming machines having a structure in which foul balls are returned to the upper tray (including cases where there is no lower tray). In the case of , a fraudulent act (the above-described fraudulent act A, Fraud similar to B) may be committed. In the case of such a game machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided in a predetermined portion of the foul return path located in the space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second tampering prevention means, but a plurality thereof may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portions of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second Two fraud prevention means may be provided. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent actions using the fraudulent ball Q.

In the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as a second tampering prevention means. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate, which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment, is not provided, and instead a taper is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k, a slit-shaped capture portion is formed in the resin molded component forming the return passage portion 1014. Alternatively, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q may be pinched by the capture portion, which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same fraud deterrence effect as the embodiment described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operating wire L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operating wire disabling member 7000. 45, FIG. 46, and FIG. 49, the illegal ball Q prevents the illegal ball Q from entering through the ball opening (prevents the illegal ball Q from moving backwards and backwards) without affecting the down flow of the normal foul ball. By providing reverse prevention means, fraudulent use of an illegal ball Q is prevented.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign object) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the path changing portion (a portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014 In addition, it can be exemplified to provide an attracting part 1022 for inducing the illegal ball Q itself to another passage to block its movement (first illegal ball reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as the above-described cheating action A in which an illegal ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. In addition, at the inlet of the attracting portion 1022, a catch valve (which allows the illegal ball Q flowing backward to enter the attracting portion 1022 to swing only in the direction of entry into the attracting portion 1022 and to A single-opening valve (not shown) that disables withdrawal may be provided, thereby leaving traces of the use of the illegal ball Q and evidence of illegal acts.

Also, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downflow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). It is possible (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as the above-described cheating action A in which an illegal ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023. FIG.

Further, it is of course possible to combine both the above-described static operating line nullifying member and dynamic operating line nullifying member.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an operating wire invalidating member other than the first operating wire invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. and the firing position, or between the foul ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 115).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the two upper corners among the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101 .

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by performing the above-described procedure in reverse order. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 54(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It sticks out at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5-1. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward as it goes to the right in the front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5-2. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 60 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5-3a. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate lower left decorative board 283, the plate lower right decorative board 288, and the operation part relay board 392. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. - 特許庁

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are separated from each other in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and a right upper plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box-like shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the left and right plate decoration units 270, 280, 275, and 275, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5-4c. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . The upper left plate decorative substrate 273 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape extending left and right along the upper left plate decoration body 271 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the plate upper right decorative body 276 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . The plate lower left decorative substrate 283 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape extending left and right along the plate lower left decorative body 281 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plate lower right decorative substrate 288 is formed in a long strip shape extending left and right along the plate lower right decoration body 286 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70 and the like. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 68(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are connected to the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decorative substrate 314 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape having a semicircular arc shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. is implemented. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semi-arc shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. is implemented. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72 and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 71(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 72(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 72(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and for detecting the rotary operation of the rotary operation portion 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the content of the player-participation-type effect according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring driving motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the player can be performed. can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape as if an annular ring is divided into front and rear parts. It is composed of a rear decoration substrate 352b formed in an arc-shaped elongated band plate. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a luminous decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5-5g. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 has shaken. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibrating device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide more diverse effects to the player.

The purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the method of attachment. If this is the case, there are cases where vibration cannot be obtained due to non-resonance due to variations in characteristics. In this embodiment, in order to absorb the variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency, but is input as a range of frequencies. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz±2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) 8 times in about 1 second for each period of 1 Hz. This is repeated intermittently by sweeping input for 1 second and then inputting again after 1 second.

In the assembly work of the game machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. It is designed to be done based on Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is powered on (or when the gaming machine is powered on while the inspector has operated the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, it performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for inspecting the vibration speaker (operation confirmation). Through this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm not only the sound (sound) such as voice or music from the vibration speaker 354, but also the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 from the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 78(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly higher than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When it is moved to the raised position after being assembled into the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 78(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 81(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, so that the rotary operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is such that, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 81(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the top surface (see FIG. 81(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 are approximately at the same height (see FIG. 81(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of this embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the central pressing operation portion 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier using the pressing operation portion 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation becomes difficult due to the pressing operation portion 303 becoming an obstacle. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 82(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door-frame left-side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door-frame left-side decorative body 404, and is composed of a left-side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window interior decorations 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape that extends vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412 . is attached to the rear portion of the connecting base 412a. A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door-frame right-side decorative body 419, and is composed of a right-side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right-side lower decorative substrate 418b. It is A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. 88(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from above, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419 .

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the horizontal direction and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a long and narrow strip extending in the left and right direction. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible for the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at a glance, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 94 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The body frame 4 includes a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the body frame base unit 500 to form a game area 5 a of the game board 5 . A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front view upper side and left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500. A rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the rear side so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501; A frame 4 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending leftward in the form of a groove that opens upward, and a second guide passage attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide path that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide path of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path. A lower full tank ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 100 and the like. FIG. 99(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-like guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 100(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 100(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 101(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launcher 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the launching base 541 attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the front view and rotated. A shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the shooting base 541 and extends forward, a ball hitting mallet 543 whose proximal end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball hitting mallet 543. A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 182 is rotated, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending long downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a. , a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and an approximately constant rightward direction from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A rear plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the rear plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and a left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front portion of the lower side to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. and have. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape. On the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, an eaves portion 551da projecting rearward is formed in the left-right direction at a portion spaced apart from the lower side by a predetermined length.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 mounted in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The sphere tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached near the rear end on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a guide passage. It is The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the one guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same plane. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction bends downward a plurality of times from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped pattern. In addition, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in an opaque white color, and are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color. The end on the one rail cover 554 side is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color. , the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

As described above, the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged has a cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction that extends downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape with multiple bends. A part of the portion formed in a plurality of bent steps is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k made of transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side as viewed from the rear of the payout base unit 550). It has 10 external terminals named ∼XCN10.)), and the board is accommodated so that the mounting surface is perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551 when viewed from the front so that the terminals are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground board 559 is arranged such that the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) is mounted is directed downward and is horizontal. When viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 is housed in the space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

Among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when housings corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). In a state in which the frame ground board 559 is accommodated and attached inside the board accommodation portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the board accommodation portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 and is difficult to see. 1 (see, eg, FIG. 93). The ground terminal ECN3 has a high height of 13.4 mm as described above, but when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball straightening member 556 and is difficult to see. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm in height as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear side, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be given later.

The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding substrate 559 is for once concentrating the electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (grounding) it to the island facility of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. FIG. 103(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. Fig. 104(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and Fig. 104(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guide unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by one guide passage of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 includes a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 can flow, and a ball drawer branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In a normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball extraction lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 110).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeating folding between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 106(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational positions of the dispensing blades. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball dropout prevention. In addition, in order to explain the rotational position of the payout blade, FIG. 107 shows the payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be visually recognized from the back of the payout device so that they can be seen, and are subject to explanation. A small circle mark is attached to the bottom portion of the ball containing portion 589b of the delivery blade 589. As shown in FIG. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and then the rotational position of the dispensing blade, prevention of ball clogging, and prevention of ball falling out will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 . The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the rear side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear lid 582.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 (tooth number Z0: 9) attached and a spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 and a second spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20), which is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 A transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587, and a plurality of gears extending outward from the payout gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) A dispensing gear member 588 having a detection piece 588b and rotatably attached between a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front lid 583, and a dispensing gear between the dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582. A payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with a member 588 and protrude into the payout passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 are detected. A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is provided. The payout motor 584 is step-driven under the control of the payout control board 633 . When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the rotation shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in this embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotating shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633 . The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and molded in opaque black. The delivery blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The ball removing movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and molded in an opaque white color. The ball extracting lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and molded in an opaque red color.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 105, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and right above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the payout detection sensor 591 .

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent to the right, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end. At this branched portion, a part of the passage inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is protruded in a rib shape toward the ball removal passage 580b. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the dispensing passage 580a are formed on the same plane to form a downwardly inclined surface when viewed from the rear. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r will be given later.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The main body side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b in the rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b having an arcuate shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a each having an arcuate shape and concentrically extending outward from the rotating shaft in the form of a flat plate at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed in an arc on the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical shape. By forming the sphere containing portions 589b at regular intervals, three blade pieces 589a forming peaks and three ball containing portions 589b forming troughs are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 106). In this manner, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593. As shown in FIG.

When the ball extraction lever 593 is raised to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a string on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592. However, the ball flows over the ball removing movable piece 592 to the ball removing passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, in a state in which the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the contact force. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, so that more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable piece 592. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of delivery blade]
As described above, the dispensing device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (the number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 ( number of teeth Z1: 20), second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), and dispensing gear 588a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payment blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payment gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payment gear member 588, etc. When the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates, the rotation is transmitted through the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 so as to rotate the dispensing blade 589. be done.

Here, the rotational speed of the payout gear member 588 is reduced from the rotational speed of the payout motor 584 by the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . This speed reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (=9) of the driving gear 585/the number of teeth Z3 (=24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by mechanical calculation. In this embodiment, the dispensing motor 584 is a stepping motor that is excited by 2-2 phase excitation and has a rotating shaft that rotates 18 degrees per one step rotation (the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 20 steps and rotates 360 degrees ( = 18 degrees x 20 steps).), and the pay-out blade 589 integrally rotated with the pay-out gear member 588 rotates by 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x reduction ratio n) when the rotating shaft of the pay-out motor 584 rotates by one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (=6.75 degrees x 54 steps), and one rotation (360 degrees rotation) results in 4.5 degrees. It will rotate an extra degree.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing vane 589 rotates 364.5 degrees. It is necessary to rotate the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 in steps of 53.333 (=360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and the step driving of the dispensing motor 584 corresponds to one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589. The number of steps, which is the number of times of , is not an integer.

That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589b are formed in the payout blade 589 at regular intervals, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by a predetermined angle of 18 degrees in accordance with step driving, Through the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, the dispensing blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees (that is, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 1 When step rotation (18 degrees rotation), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B for each 120 degree rotation, and payout In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 17.777 steps (=120 degrees/6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 18 step rotation, which is an integer obtained by rounding up the decimal point, is set to the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout vane 589, so that the payout vane 589, by rotating more than 120 degrees (actually, by rotating 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the position to receive the next game ball B can be rotated.

The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it rotates (360 degrees), but there are cases where only one game ball B is put out, and for example, cigarette tar and dust can be put out. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotation position of the payout blade 589 due to such as, each time one game ball B is paid out, the processing of setting the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is performed. is preferred. In the present embodiment, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout vane 589 is set to 18 step rotation, which is an integer obtained by rounding up the decimal point, as described above. The payout blade 589 is rotated by more than 120 degrees (actually, rotated by 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and each time one game ball B is paid out, a payout A process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the delivery blade 589 .

In addition, since the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one game ball is put out Even if the error accumulates, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that one game ball is detected. Every time you pay out, you can reset the accumulated error. As a result, even if an error occurs each time one game ball is put out due to the influence of cigarette tar or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset each time one game ball is put out. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for errors to occur in the rotational position of the payout vane 589 that receives and delivers game balls.

In addition, since the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one game ball is put out, The positioning position is different every time. As a result, since the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, the adhesion positions of tar and dust can be dispersed. In addition, if the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated. , and is provided coaxially with the rotating shaft of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. This ensures the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotating portion for receiving and feeding game balls is changed each time the game balls are put out, thereby dispersing the positions where the tar and dust adhere, thereby preventing tar and dust. It is possible to have a strong payout device 580 against. The dispensing device 580 has one dispensing passage 580a as described above. For this reason, compared to a payout device having payout vanes in two payout passages, when the game ball payout speed is the same, the payout vane 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in this embodiment should rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 compared to the payout device having payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is also doubled, the probability that cigarette tar and dust adhere to the delivery blade 589 is high.

In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, as described above, the dispensing blade 589 exceeds one rotation. If the set is defined and managed as a set, every time the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, an angle difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the dispensing blade 589. For example, 80 sets In this case, the angular difference is finally accumulated up to 360 degrees (=4.5 degrees×80 sets), and the number of game balls B to be paid out increases by 3 balls.

As described above, the payout gear member 588 has three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions each having a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout control board 633 controls the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. As a result, a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is set as one management range. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

Specifically, first, of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. 9 step rotation of the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (=6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). , and since the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is defined as the nine-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. (This corresponds to 60.75 degrees (=6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588.).

That is, in the present embodiment, a 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed are used as a light shielding range, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates in nine steps, and detection is performed. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is the light receiving range, and the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is controlled by 18 steps of rotation, which is combined with 9 steps of rotation. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps.

When the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 9 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotating integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). and the light receiving range of 60 degrees. A 60-degree area (light receiving range) in which the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably discriminated.

Here, a method for setting the origin of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107(a), the payout control board 633 is in a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (“first edge ) is set with the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the point A as the origin, as shown in FIG. 107(b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b of the payout vane 589. As shown in FIG. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 and the central axis of rotation of the payout vane 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 from the origin by 4 steps as the B point. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (referred to as a "second edge detection state"). In the region where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from point A to the origin and point B, as shown in FIG. A 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed in the 120-degree region of the member 588 in the circumferential direction.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 from the point B by 9 steps as the point A described above again. At this time, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 at the origin is moved downstream from the payout vane 589 in the payout passage 580a. In the region where the rotational position of the pay-out blade 589 that rotates integrally with the pay-out gear member 588 rotates from point B to point A, as shown in FIG. 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed in the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction.

Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on process when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure). When the payout control board 633 executes the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting in the payout control side power-on process, the steady process is repeatedly executed. After the interrupt start setting, the payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) and executes the payout control side 2ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various kinds of processing such as payout motor control processing, history creation processing, and origin setting processing in the payout control side 2ms interrupt processing.

The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation process. The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and last time. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is blocking or not blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit to the most significant bit of history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit-shifting one bit at a time, if both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or when the current and previous confirmation results differ (for example, the current and previous confirmation results are different). One of the confirmation results is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is when the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. is found), set the value 1 to the least significant bit.

In this way, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width in the history creation process every 4 ms when the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process for setting the rotational position of the payout vane 589 as the origin based on the history information updated every 4 ms. By repeatedly executing the payout motor control process, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is positioned at point A. Since the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned as the detection piece. 588b becomes a non-blocking state.

Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having a width of 8 bits, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590 just before the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 reaches the point A. 00000001B (“B” indicates bit information; the same shall apply hereinafter) is set because the transition state (first edge detection state) occurs when the optical axis of . . When the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from point A to the origin, 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having a width of 8 bits. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first judgment value of 11110000B, thereby extracting the data from the 8th time to the 5th time before from the history information as the calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result is 00110000B due to the first masking process). Data is taken out as a calculation result (here, the calculation result becomes 00010000B due to the second mask processing), and if the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is not at the origin, and the payout blade While the current rotational position of the delivery vane 589 is not set as the origin, if the value is not 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the delivery vane 589 is at the origin, and the current rotation position of the delivery vane 589 is set as the origin.

When the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is set as the origin in the origin setting process, the dispensing control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 five steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to point B, and from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point B, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps (that is, beyond the light shielding range). and the light receiving range again). In a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotational position of the delivery vane 589 is set to the point A again, this processing is finished as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, until the time for rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 a total of 13 steps elapses, An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting origin setting for the delivery blade 589 .

The payout control board 633 executes the payout motor control process to switch the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is positioned at the point A to bring the rotational position of the payout vane 589 to the origin. is 20 ms (=4 ms×5 step rotations), and from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 5 steps to change the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 to B The point time is 16 ms (=4 ms×4 step rotations), and from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is positioned at the point B, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps (that is, the light shielding range is 36 ms (=4 ms×9 step rotations) to set the rotational position of the delivery blade 589 to the point A again. As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 in 18 steps. By rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 584 in 18 steps, it takes 72 ms (=4 ms×18 step rotations).

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a payout device that pays out game balls in a number corresponding to the amount of rotation of a payout rotator that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor (for example, JP-A-2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the game machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 ms, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for 4 steps to put out one game ball. ing. In pachinko machines installed in pachinko parlors, it is unavoidable that cigarette tar, dust, etc. adhered to game balls adhere to the inside of the payout device. Moreover, since the dispensing device is not disassembled for cleaning, there is a demand for a dispensing device that is resistant to cigarette tar and dust. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by driving the payout motor for four steps and one game ball is put out. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotor is the same each time. For this reason, there is a problem that the positions where cigarette tar and dust adhere are also fixed and easily accumulated.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then the prevention of ball removal due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

As described above, the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened. It is possible. When the ball is to be removed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. A total of four game balls B are stopped over a rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r projecting toward the ball extraction passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. As this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and downstream (that is, the payout blade 589 is present). It has a length that is located downstream of the payout passage 580a. As a result, a part of the passage inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a protrudes from the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 toward the ball removal passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. When a plurality of game balls B are parked in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, part of the last game ball B that is stopped protrudes toward the ball extraction passage 580b in the ball clogging preventing portion 581r. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a described above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. However, it has a length that allows it to flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. In this way, a portion of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stays on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r in a state of protruding toward the ball extraction passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention The width of the ball extraction passage 580b is regulated to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down, depending on the length of part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protruding toward the ball extraction passage 580b. It is possible to do so.

In addition, as described above, the ball clogging preventing portion 581r is formed so that the upper surface thereof and the passage inner wall surface forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane and form a right downward inclined surface in a rear view.

That is, when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and the ball is removed, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is a downwardly inclined surface when viewed from the rear. , so that the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is located downstream of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from popping due to collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a in the vicinity of the left end of the ball clogging preventing portion 581r.

As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r moves along the ball extraction path (the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a) and the ball extraction path 580b. 108(a), the width of the ball removal passage 580b is regulated so that one game ball B can flow down. Ball clogging can thereby be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ball clogging during ball extraction. In this embodiment, the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589, but is set to range from a minimum width of 12 mm to a maximum width of 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur where the width of various passages is narrowed from more than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball (eg, 21 mm).

Next, a description will be given of prevention of the ball coming out due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584. FIG. In the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the game ball B is stopped in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the following game ball B is in contact with the game ball B in a daisy chain. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 and the central axis of rotation of the payout vane 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then slightly to the right from there. After being bent obliquely downward, it is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 .

Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B in contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 ( center of gravity) position, and in a state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b of the payout blade 589 will follow. A rightward force (that is, a clockwise rotating force) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B.

In such a state, when the payout motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the central axis of rotation of the payout vane 589, and is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589. The game ball B will flow down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will drop out.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, even if the payout blade 589 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the central axis of rotation of the payout blade 589, the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 does not move the payout blade 589. A payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout blade 589 in a rear view is shaped so that it can be stopped after six steps of rotation from the origin.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 108(c), when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops. , the game ball B that contacts the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, points S1 where the game ball B contacts the side wall of the payout passage 580a, and the outer periphery of the arc-shaped blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 The side of the ball containing portion 589b containing the game ball B (that is, the ball containing portion 589b containing the game ball B and the ball containing portion 589b and the following ball containing portion 589b where the game ball B is not contained) part 589b, of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a that connects the part 589b, the S2 point that abuts on the ball housing portion 589b side where the game ball B is stored from the center of this outer peripheral surface) The shape of the dispensing passage 580a is formed. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the delivery blade 589 can be generated, and the rotating shaft of the delivery motor 584 can rotate six steps from the origin of the delivery blade 589 and stop. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 .

When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout vane 589 and stops, the payout vane 589 rotates six steps from the origin. As shown in FIG. 107(d), the light shielding range (9 steps) has been rotated by 2 steps beyond point B, which is rotated by 4 steps from the origin. However, when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps (remaining 7 step rotations + 5 step rotations from point A to advance by rotating 2 steps out of 9 steps shown in FIG. 107(d)), the payout blade 589 The rotation position of becomes the origin, and the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 flows down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and is reliably detected by the payout detection sensor 591. ing. Therefore, even when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout vane 589 (progressing after rotating 6 steps), the number of game balls B paid out does not become excessive.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 responds to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200, payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5, etc. In response, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). When the power is restored after (instantaneous power failure), first, the payout motor 584 is controlled so that the rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not returned to the origin. As described above, this causes an excessive number of game balls B to be paid out in a state in which the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (proceeding by rotating six steps) and stopped. This is to prevent

[4-7-3. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 110).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b have front end openings (downstream ends). opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a gradually increases toward the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are arranged in the upper full position. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows into the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627, which opens leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, receives a predetermined number of balls from the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 115 and the like. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a front view near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. and a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and obliquely downwards and rearwards. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side facing forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the panel front member 42, and the panel rear member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it communicates with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through tube 623a extending in a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 621d and penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. When the speaker unit 620a is assembled, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and . The island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the AC 100 volt (AC 100 V) commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24 volt (AC 24 V) game machine power supply voltage. AC 24V stepped down in the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc.) from AC 24V supplied from the island facilities of the game hall and supplies them to various boards.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 115) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632 . In addition, the payout control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. In order to open the control board box 632, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrence against fraudulent acts on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, etc., and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. In a state assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 (the rear surface of the eaves portion 551da formed on the rear plate upper portion 551d described above). there is When the back cover 640 is assembled to the body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a is in surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551, and the contact portion is , and is covered with an eaves portion 551da formed to protrude from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically, except for the contact portion 640a. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 116(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude backward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a door frame that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and rotates depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, thereby opening the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 . 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. FIG. FIG. 117(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like, viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b with a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. .

The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length (in this embodiment, approximately 30 mm) are formed at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in this embodiment). Due to the rectangular notch portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of about 7 mm added forward from the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a to the thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment). A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed in the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a. , about 2.5 mm) and a length of about 30 mm in the horizontal direction.

The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are worn such that the game balls B collide with each other, rub against each other, and the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B and falls. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B adheres to the main guiding portion 553a, the downstream flow of the game ball B is hindered, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. As a result, the payout of game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. As a result, for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by this, and the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a is worn out by inserting a cotton swab into the notch portion 553aa by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing an operation to remove the metal powder.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the balls in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect of use.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and the overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outer side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b in which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The rear surface of the base body 501a has a flat plate shape extending from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper side of the rear surface. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o have upper ends higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, respectively, and extend in the front-rear direction in a band-like shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Also, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. In addition, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d in the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the sphere tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 is connected to the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the left portion extending straight in the left-right direction are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 such that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a step-like manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the left-right direction on its rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B that has been dropped can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 122). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by meshing of game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 123, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the side of the detour passage 552g presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting stuck due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being different, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned to Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 122) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 122, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, Since the game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

In addition, the ball tank 552 is molded from conductive resin, whereas the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later, are molded from non-conductive resin. In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. It repels and is designed not to be attracted to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B falling outside from the main guide portion 553a through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 ) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 117(a), and is a schematic view of the configuration for dealing with metal powder. In FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the parts of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are represented as cross-sectional views.

When the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, which may cause the peripheral control unit 1500 to malfunction or malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, includes ICs such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs become smaller, the pin intervals of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface), it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). are displaced by the distance dimension).

As described above, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape that bends downward in multiple directions. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is designed to be placed. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the body frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 as described above. This contacting portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and adhered to the top plate portion 551a, or is received and adhered to the convex portion 551da. It is possible to do so. Further, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the rear cover 640 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are in surface contact with each other and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d. Since it is covered with the formed convex portion 551da, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is pushed through the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 from the contact portion. The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 are prevented from falling. It has become.

In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the upper back plate portion 551d of the payout base 551 are provided with a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Dust is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) are provided. The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600) is out of alignment (in this embodiment, the distance dimension is about half the diameter of the game ball B). Due to this arrangement (that is, due to the structure in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch portion 553aa), electrical trouble due to metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is prevented. It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later), whereas the upper side, the left side, and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later) are provided. Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, it is assumed that the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 1501 can be made difficult even if it does.

Further, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed with a fan mounting recess having a square shape for mounting the air cooling fan FAN, which will be described later, on the center side thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles are formed on the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the groove. In addition, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 has seven connectors (to be described later) provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and seven connector holes and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to volume control switches. A volume adjustment hole is formed in each, and two connector holes are formed in positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed through the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed through this volume control hole. Further, when a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later, is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed through these two connector holes.

When the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. Air from the outside of the unit 1500 passes through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. , and the above-described gaps (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover through the gap formed in the volume adjustment hole formed in the body 1501, and the gap formed in the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). , will be taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess of the cover body 1501 (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the area of the ventilation holes 1501az described above. The gaps (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the volume adjustment switches provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the gaps formed in the cover body 1501 the volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in the gap, and the gap formed in the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). It's getting smaller. Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is allowed to pass through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. , the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be kept low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heavy metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

Incidentally, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 via the blades due to this rotation. Since the air flow speed increases due to the rotation of the wings of the ball, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is more likely to be sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 under the influence of the air flow. Electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by metal powder may cause problems (failures) in various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 attached inside the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as a canopy to prevent the fan from being sucked in by the fan FAN. It can be configured to have a function as a canopy to prevent the heavy metal powder of B from being sucked into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is of a thin type. is selected (that is, one having a distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN that is smaller than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the fan mounting recess is selected) and formed in the cover body 1501 When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the fan-mounting recess, the inner wall of the fan-mounting recess functions as a canopy to prevent the heavy metal powder of the game ball B from being sucked into the air-cooling fan FAN. can do. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Next, another configuration of the present invention that can avoid electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B (hereinafter referred to as "metal powder countermeasures according to second to fifth embodiments") ) will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. FIG. 126 shows a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter referred to as "structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment") are denoted by the same reference numerals. , the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the parts of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are represented as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are separated from each other. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The upper portion 551d of the back plate described above in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and extends upward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the bent end face of the top plate portion 551a is arranged above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged substantially on the same plane. A rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, which is arranged substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553, is formed by branching from a portion where the effect display device 1600 is attached and extending rearward.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 , the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 . The contact portion is covered with the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box of the back unit 3000 are arranged. The difference is that the rear surface 3010d of 3010 is arranged substantially on the same plane. In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. 3010da, and the contact portion is covered with the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It is designed so that it can be attached. Further, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact with each other, and are formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is pushed from the contact portion to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000 The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

In this way, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are dropped to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B is directed toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can prevent falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are separated from each other. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The upper portion 551d of the back plate described above in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a is near the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude below a notch portion 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 . The top surface of the curved top plate portion 551a located below the tank rail 553 and the top surface of the contact portion 640a are in contact with each other. are arranged on the same plane.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, A bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are substantially flush with each other. The difference is that it is placed in In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent to be disposed below the tank rail 553 . The upper surface of the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are arranged on the same plane. The difference is that

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is deposited on the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553. and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640 so that it can be received and attached. Furthermore, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in surface contact with each other. As a result, since no gap is formed, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa, moves from the contact portion to the game panel of the game board 5. 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It's like

In this way, the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 can be used for the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can prevent Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are separated from each other. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward from one side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper portion 551d of the back plate in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, the distance dimension is about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 , the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553 . The rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed by protruding downward. is covered by the rear surface of the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the .

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, , the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude slightly rearward compared to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. is different. In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is arranged below the tank rail 553 . The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in a state of surface contact with a convex portion 551ab formed by protruding downward. , is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is placed below the tank rail 553, and the bent top plate portion It is adapted to be received and attached at 551a. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and a convex portion 551ab formed on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and protruding downward, is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, and therefore falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the contact part of the metal powder of the game ball B that hits. The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 thereof.

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as a canopy that can prevent this, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as a canopy disposed below the tank rail 553 is replaced with a separate member (another structural component). It can also be configured to attach to the

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downwardly of the tank rail 553 is arranged as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged. are arranged substantially on the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward from one side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper portion 551d of the back plate in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and extends downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). In other words, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is greatly bent forward to form an abutment portion. The front surface of 640a is arranged parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a and comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. It is in a state of contact.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has a gutter-shaped main guide. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, which is arranged parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and protrudes downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a, is in surface contact with the rear surface of the main guide portion 553a. The contacting portion is arranged with a large shift forward from the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, , the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is bent forward greatly when the back cover 640 is assembled to the body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is aligned with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, which is arranged in parallel and protrudes downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a, is in surface contact with the rear surface of the main guide portion 553a. The difference is that they are arranged with a large shift forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the guide portion 553a.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is dropped to the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached to the upper surface of the contact portion 640a that is formed by bending the side of the contact portion 640a toward the front. Furthermore, it is arranged parallel to the front surface of the abutment portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, and protrudes downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a. is not formed. For this reason, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa moves from the contact portion to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

In this way, the contact portion 640a, which is formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 greatly forward, extends from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can prevent the ball from falling toward the player, and also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a tank rail that guides game balls from a ball tank to the downstream side (for example, JP-A-2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter falling from the holes provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board located below the tank rail, electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. It was In recent control boards, as the number of objects to be controlled increases, the interval between connector pins becomes narrower. Therefore, it is necessary to take countermeasures against electrical problems caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. FIG. 130 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a front view showing a game area in which game balls circulate on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 131). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. It is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be received or passed through the opening 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 131). In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115, 153, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are accommodated in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this picture-frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The metal back cover is fixed to the picture-frame-shaped metal frame to be electrically connected, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the drive circuit housed in the picture-frame-shaped metal frame. It's like

The performance display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of a peripheral control board 1510 or the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby providing the same effect. ground (GND). In effect display device 1600, the periphery of the liquid crystal panel is surrounded by a picture-frame-shaped metal frame, so that the region of the liquid crystal panel surrounded by the picture-frame-shaped metal frame becomes a visible display region of effect display device 1600. A double-sided adhesive tape is attached to the front surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame, and a single transparent plate (1 mm thick in this embodiment) is attached so as to cover the front surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame and its inner area. ) is attached (glued).

A mounting portion for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 is formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and one of the metal shield plates of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed. A through hole is formed to expose the portion. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, a part of the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, which will be described later in detail. Through the formed through-hole, the back cover of the effect display device 1600 is brought into contact with the metal back cover via the conductive elastic member. As a result, the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second start port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003; Either according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the one start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 It is provided with a first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 through which game balls B can be accepted.

In addition, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a vertical center at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a A gate unit 2300 having a gate part 2003 attached to the lower part of the game area 5a, and one general prize winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a box shape with an open front. and a lower movable production unit 3100, an upper rear movable production unit 3200, and an upper front movable production unit 3300 attached in the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 100. FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front and rear directions for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder detachably holds the panel plate 1110, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a through-hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has the same size as the game area 5a. ing.

In addition, the panel holder has a notch portion that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion is formed so as to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated and the lower portion is fully extended. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the tank ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the bottom to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 153) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second starting opening sensor 2511, a first large winning opening sensor 2512, a second large winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , second attacker solenoid 2516, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, and magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator, which is not shown in detail, and consists of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions of the opening/closing pattern of at least one of the first big prize winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 ( A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 and the like for controlling the progress of effects provided to the player based on commands from the main control board 1310 .

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board and liquid crystal output board to be described later). there is The configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially covers the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A first big prize winning port 2005 and a second big prize winning port 2006 that allow acceptance of the game ball B in at least one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. , is equipped with

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. Right under the gate section 2003, the right general prize winning opening 2001 is arranged. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the general prize winning opening 2001 on the right side in the lower left of the gate portion 2003 . The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged in a slightly lower position to the left of the first big winning opening 2005 .

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1008 in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one general prize winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002. A start port unit 2100 and a start port A side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 in the front view, and a side unit 2200 at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a with respect to the center in the vertical direction A gate unit 2300 attached to the bottom and having a gate part 2003, and one general prize winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a gate unit 2300 attached to the center of the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center role 2500 having a first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006, and a transparent presentation unit 2600 attached so as to close the frame of the center role 2500. and has.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is arranged at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and is located below the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass through in the vertical direction one by one, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003 .

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected. In addition, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2511 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2512 or the second big winning hole sensor 2513, and then moves to the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is sent and ejected to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8-1. Center role]
Center role item 2500 of table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. FIG. FIG. 132 is a front view of the center accessory and the display effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. FIG. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the lower movable effect unit 3100 provided in the back unit 3000, and the upper front movable effect unit. 3300 etc. can be visually recognized from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference except for the lower side, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned within the frame. are made invulnerable to

The center accessory 2500 includes one general prize winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right corner of the outer circumference of the frame when viewed from the front, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below and to the left of the general winning opening 2001, It has a first big winning hole 2005 arranged below the second starting hole 2004 and a second big winning hole 2006 arranged to the left of the first big winning hole 2005 and slightly below. In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. A warp exit 2502 opened in a frame and a stage 2503 capable of rolling the game ball B discharged from the warp exit 2502 in the horizontal direction and then discharging it into the game area 5a are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100. 1110), the center position in the left-right direction is the lowest. This stage 2503 is inclined such that the lowest portion in the center in the left-right direction is lowered forward, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from this portion. The height of the lowest portion of the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately the same height as the second starting port 2004 .

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received by the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a second starting opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a first large winning opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. A winning hole sensor 2512 and a second big winning hole sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 are provided (see FIG. 153). In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a starting opening solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. A first attacker solenoid 2515 for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004, the first starting opening 2002 or the second A second attacker solenoid 2516 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 is provided.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side face in a front view are aligned with the outer periphery (the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. In addition, when the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner in the front view. The lower right corner portion in front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, forming a space between the lower right corner portion and the upper portion of the right side surface. A gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, the game ball B can be accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 which are opened (opened) with a high probability.

[5-8-2. display unit]
Display rendering unit 2600 in table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 136 and the like. FIG. 133 is a side cross-sectional view of the display effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the horizontal direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the display effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 135 is a front view showing the light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown with the front light guide plate of the display effect unit illuminated.

The display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the frame-like center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2630 for irradiating light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and a center function covering the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. a front cover 2650 attached to 2500;

The front light guide plate 2610 of the display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent plate-like light guide plate main body 2611 and a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 formed on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It has a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 that reflect incident light forward. The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of four specific light entrance portions 2612a, 2612b, 3rd specific light entrance portions 2612c, and 4th specific light entrance portions 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light entering portion 2612a, the second specific light entering portion 2612b, the third specific light entering portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction). Then, they are arranged in order from left to right in two circles (the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d is followed by the first specific light entrance portion 2612a).

The reflecting concave portion 2613 has a plane extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entering portion 2612 and inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed into a pent roof-like triangle. The reflective concave portions 2613 can reflect light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portions 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . In addition, the reflecting recesses 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 .

As a result, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 134, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflecting concave portion 2613 toward the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 (perpendicular to the plane of the paper). A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the reflecting concave portion 2613 as emitting light. On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 134, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflective concave portion 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate main body 2611, A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees that the reflecting concave portion 2613 does not emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 is in a triangular concave state and extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, this is not the case. , and it is sufficient if it extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612 .

The plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 correspond to any one of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a and the second specific light incident portion 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. a plurality of second reflecting recesses 2613b corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light entering portion 2612c; a plurality of fourth reflecting recesses corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d The concave portion 2613d, and the like.

In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 that can be displayed in different manners by reflecting light forward from a specific group of the reflecting recesses 2613 among the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613 . there is The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a consisting only of a plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of second reflective concave portions 2613b, and a third pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of third reflective concave portions 2613c. It is composed of a pattern 2614c and a fourth pattern 2614d consisting of only a plurality of fourth reflecting concave portions 2613d.

The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric, as shown in FIGS. are arranged in such an order as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

Reflector 2620 has fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. By inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed concave portion 2621, the reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and the back side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without play. can. Through holes 2622 penetrating vertically are formed in the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed concave portion 2621 at portions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 .

The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending left and right, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted at a portion directly above the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620 on the lower surface. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 are formed to face downward through the through holes 2622 .

A plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 . The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light entrance portion 2612b, and a third specific light entrance portion 2612c. and a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d. A first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in a row in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction. (The fourth LED group 2630d is followed by the first LED group 2630a). In this embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630 .

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the first specific light incident portion 2612a, is reflected forward by the first reflecting concave portion 2613a, and is reflected from the remaining second LEDs. Since the second reflecting recess 2613b, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d reflect to other than the front, only the first reflecting recess 2613a can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A first pattern 2614a composed of a plurality of first reflecting concave portions 2613a can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 135(a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the second specific light entrance portion 2612b, is reflected forward by the second reflecting recess 2613b, and is reflected from the remaining second LED group 2630b. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, A second pattern 2614b composed of a plurality of second reflecting concave portions 2613b can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 135(b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the third specific light entrance portion 2612c, is reflected forward by the third reflecting recess portion 2613c, and is reflected from the remaining third LED group 2630c. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting recess 2613c can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A third pattern 2614c composed of a plurality of third reflecting recesses 2613c can be illuminated (see FIG. 135(c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, the light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d, is reflected to the front by the fourth reflecting recess portion 2613d, and the remaining Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A fourth pattern 2614d composed of a plurality of fourth reflecting concave portions 2613d can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 135(d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are arranged in a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group 2630c. When the LED group 2630d is illuminated in order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d can be illuminated in order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. It is possible to perform a lighting effect like an animation.

On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second The pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a can be illuminated in order, and a lighting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

As described above, according to the display effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be caused to emit light from a single front light guide plate 2610. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, and a wide space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. can be easily secured. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. are arranged on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players, and in addition to the performance by the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable performance By performing movable performances by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, the upper front movable performance unit 3300, etc., various performances can be provided to the players, and the players are entertained and the decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, the surface light guide plate 2610 makes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 appear in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600 by point-like light emission of the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613. Since it is possible to show moving luminous decorations like animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to players who are accustomed to luminous effects using conventional light guide plates, and to surprise and amuse the players. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the luminous display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, other players far from the front can see the pattern 2614. To prevent other players from paying attention by making it difficult to see light emitting display and making it difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed. At the same time, the player can play the game without worrying about other players, thereby making the game enjoyable and suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixing recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 can be reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected forward by the corresponding reflecting concave portion 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably illuminated.

Furthermore, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 attached to the center accessory 2500 in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is illuminated by the LED 2630, the light is emitted. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, and the game becomes hard to see. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 can be mounted more easily than in the conventional case where two members are used for attachment. , and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, since the LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LEDs 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be displayed. Light emission display can be reliably performed.

Further, by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) covers the entire periphery of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the space, the effect image etc. can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in a good state to suppress the decline in interest, and the pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness can be provided by not having a frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the game area 5a. It is possible to improve the appearance of the inside and make it appealing to strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. A strong impact can be given to the player who thought that the 2610 did not exist, and the player can be surprised, and the light emitting display of the plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating due to the reflectors 2620 being visible. , the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not expect, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen to the player, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of the plurality of patterns 2614 different from each other by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be achieved. Since it is possible to show the player an effect combining these, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 The player can be entertained by the performance by and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescently displayed patterns 2614 by displaying an effect image associated with the plurality of luminescently displayed patterns 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section that extends uniformly, but is not limited to this. may be polygonal and extending at a constant rate, or may have a curved cross-section and extending at a constant rate, or the like.

Also, the LED 2630 may be monochromatic or full-color. Also, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the numbers of specific light incident portions, reflecting recesses, and LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of patterns 2614 .

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. Figure 137 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower front center decorative body is illuminated in the lower movable production unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower rear central decoration body is illuminated, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the center decoration, the lower rear center decoration, the lower left side decoration, and the lower right side decoration are illuminated. 140 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 139 and the depressing operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. In addition, FIG. 141 shows four rotating decorations, a left side rotating decoration, a left sub-side rotating decoration, a right side rotating decoration, and a right sub-side rotating decoration, which are developed in the lower movable production unit, and the decoration parts on each side are displayed. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the decoration of. FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the types (sizes) of arrows that are light-emitting displayed in the lower movable production unit.

Also, FIG. 143 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable production unit.

The back unit 3000 has an effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100 . The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 153).

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and having a box-like shape with an open front. A lower movable effect unit 3100 attached to the lower part, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010, and an upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010 and in front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 An upper front movable production unit 3300 is provided.

[5-9-1. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 142 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part inside the back box 3010 and partly positioned in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600 . The lower movable production unit 3100 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached near the front end of the back box 3010 below the production display device 1600, and a lower center production arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. A unit 3120 and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170 arranged on both left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120 are provided.

The lower front center decoration unit 3110 includes a lower front center decoration body 3111 which is trapezoidal (inverted isosceles triangle with a flattened vertex) and has translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is positioned behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 . The lower front center decoration body 3111 can be illuminated by the lower center decoration substrate of the lower center effect unit 3120 .

The lower central production unit 3120 is attached to the front of the lower central elevating base 3121 attached to the back box 3010 behind the lower front central decorative unit 3110 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and to the front of the lower central elevating base 3121, and is translucent. and a lower center decorative substrate (illustrated are omitted), and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121 .

In addition, although illustration is omitted, the lower central effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box 3010, a pair of lifting guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central lifting base in the vertical direction, A rod-shaped arm member whose proximal end is attached to the unit base so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member and inserted into the slit of the lower central elevating base 3121, and the arm member a lower center lift drive motor that rotates the

Although not shown, the lower central elevating base 3121 has a slit extending to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is driven by a lower center elevating drive motor between a lowered position where the whole is behind the lower front center decoration 3111 and a raised position where the whole is above the lower front center decoration 3111. Mounted so that it can be lifted.

The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged vertically. The lower rear center decoration 3122 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light from the LED of the lower center decoration substrate. The lower central decoration board is mounted with a plurality of LEDs so that each light emitting area 3122a of the lower rear central decoration 3122 can be independently illuminated, and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so that it can irradiate light toward the lower front central decorative body 3111 which is downward and forward.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and each of them extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotary drive motors attached to a plurality of mounting bases with their rotary shafts oriented in the left-right direction, and a plurality of central rotary drive motors attached to the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors. and a plurality of cubic rotary decorations 3126 covering the . A plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 are rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a central rotary drive motor, and are arranged coaxially in the lateral direction. In addition, each rotating decorative body 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). The plurality of rotary decorations 3126 can be independently rotated by their respective central rotary drive motors.

Although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is attached below each rotary decoration 3126 on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and has a plurality of units capable of irradiating light toward each rotary decoration 3126. It has a bottom center top decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower central upper surface decorative substrate.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a flat plate-shaped lower piece extending horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece. It has a side part and a flat upper side part extending rightward from the upper end of the side part to the upper side of the lower piece part shorter than the lower piece part, and the front of the unit base of the lower central effect unit 3120 A left unit base mounted in the back box 3010 on the left side of the view, and a columnar guide near the right side of the left unit base whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively. A rod-shaped male screw having a male screw formed on its outer circumference, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft. A lower left side elevation base 3151 having a nut screwed to the male threaded member and slidably attached to the guide shaft, and a lower part attached to the left unit base and rotating the male threaded member. A left side lifting drive motor, a translucent lower left side decoration 3152 attached to the front surface of the lower left side lifting base 3151, and a right side of the lower left side decoration 3152 attached to the left side. a lower left side decorative substrate mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of radiating light toward.

The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a vertical direction, and by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate to emit light, each light emitting region 3152a can be independently decorated with light emission.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and has a slit extending back and forth, A lower left slide driving motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotating shaft extends upward under the slider, and the lower left slide driving motor is attached to the rotating shaft of the lower left slide driving motor at the base end side. a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into a slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the proximal end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base that is mounted on the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state that the rotation axis is directed to the mounting base in the left and right direction. It has an attached left side rotation drive motor, and a cubic left side rotation decoration 3153 attached to the rotating shaft of the left side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left side rotation drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). In addition, the left side rotary decoration body 3153 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a left side rotary drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotary decoration 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the left side rotary decoration 3153. It has a lower left side top decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The left side rotary decoration 3153 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the lower left side upper surface decoration substrate.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub mounting base A left sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with its rotational axis directed in the left-right direction, and a left sub-side rotation cubic mounted on the rotational shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left sub-side rotation drive motor. A decorative body 3155 is provided. The left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 has different decorations 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). In addition, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a left sub-side rotary drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base, and faces the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155. and a lower left subside top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be decorated with light emission by properly lighting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

When the lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled on the game board 5, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 attached to the left unit base is positioned at a height such that the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a left side rotating decorative body 3153 between the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and the leftmost rotating decorative body 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 when assembled on the game board 5. are spaced to allow entry.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevation drive motor, thereby moving the left side rotating decorative body 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevation base 3151 to the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower central elevating base 3121 can be lifted between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotary decoration 3126 at the lowered position and an elevated position at the same height as the left subside rotary decoration 3155 . In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor, so that the left side rotary decoration body 3153 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 through the slider. , and a retracted position in which about half of it is positioned below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 away from the lower central effect unit 3120, and can be slid in the left-right direction.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a flat plate-like lower piece extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece. It has a side part and a flat plate-like upper side part extending leftward from the upper end of the side part to the upper side of the lower piece part and shorter than the lower piece part, and the front of the unit base of the lower central effect unit 3120 A right unit base mounted inside the back box 3010 on the right side of the view, and a columnar guide near the left side of the right unit base whose bottom and top ends are attached to the bottom and top pieces, respectively. A rod-shaped male screw with a male screw formed on the outer circumference, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft. a lower right side elevation base 3171 having a nut screwed to the male threaded member and slidably attached to the guide shaft; and a lower part attached to the right unit base for rotating the male threaded member. A right side lifting drive motor, a translucent lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the front surface of the lower right side lifting base 3171, and a right side of the lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the right side. a lower right side decorative substrate mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of radiating light toward.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a vertical direction, and by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate to emit light, each light emitting region 3172a can be independently decorated with light emission.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and has a slit extending back and forth. A lower right slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotation shaft extends upward under the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotation shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into a slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the proximal end side of the cage.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the slider and has a mounting base extending upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is directed to the mounting base in the left and right direction. It has an attached right side rotation drive motor, and a cubic right side rotation decoration 3173 attached to the rotation shaft of the right side rotation drive motor and covering the outer circumference of the right side rotation drive motor. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 has four circumferential surfaces formed with different decorative portions 3174 (see FIG. 141). In addition, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a right side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotary decoration 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotary decoration 3173. It has a lower right side top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape. A right sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with its rotational axis directed in the horizontal direction, and a cubic right sub-side rotation mounted on the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer circumference of the right sub-side rotation drive motor. A decorative body 3175 is provided. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 141). In addition, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a right sub-side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175. and a lower right subside top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

When the lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled on the game board 5, the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 attached to the right unit base is positioned at a height such that the right side rotary decoration 3173 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the raised end. In addition, the lower right side production unit 3170 has a right side rotary decoration 3173 between the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 and the rightmost rotary decoration 3126 of the lower central production unit 3120 when assembled on the game board 5. are spaced so that they can enter.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side elevation drive motor, thereby moving the right side rotating decorative body 3173 together with the slider via the lower right side elevation base 3171 to the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower central elevating base 3121 can be lifted between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotary decoration 3126 at the lowered position and an elevated position at the same height as the right subside rotary decoration 3175 . In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor, so that the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 through the slider. , and a retracted position in which about half of it is positioned below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 away from the lower central effect unit 3120, and can be slid in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 141, the lower movable production unit 3100 includes the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the decoration part 3154 of the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the decoration part 3156 of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and the left side rotation decoration body 3155. Different decorations are formed on the decoration portion 3174 of the side rotating decoration body 3173 and the decoration portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend left and right. Decorations different from each other are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotating shaft.

When the first surface of each of the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 faces the front, It is "o" "one eye" "one eye" "two eyes" "three eyes" "four eyes" "one eye" "o". In addition, when the second surface of each is turned to the front, it is "star", "super", "chi", "cha", "n", "su", "!", and "star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is facing the front, from the left, "!" Furthermore, when the fourth side is facing the front, from the left are "celebration", "!", "o", "me", "de", "to", "u", and "!!".

In this way, the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 are turned so that the surfaces with the same numbers are directed to the front. , a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value for a "big win" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142, the lower movable effect unit 3100 appropriately emits light from the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172. "Arrows" of different sizes can be illuminated. Specifically, when only the lower front central decorative body 3111 is illuminated, a triangular "small arrow" with the vertex of the isosceles triangle pointing downward can be illuminated (see FIGS. 137 and 142(a)). reference). In addition, when the lower front center decoration 3111 and the raised lower rear center decoration 3122 are illuminated, a downward-pointing "middle arrow" having a bar extending upward larger than the "small arrow" is illuminated. (see FIGS. 138 and 142(b)). Furthermore, in the state of the "center arrow", the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decoration body are lifted. When all the side decorations 3172 are illuminated, it is possible to illuminate a "large arrow" in which the upper end of an arrow that is larger than the "middle arrow" and is directed downward spreads to the left and right (FIGS. 139 and 142(c)). ).

In this way, three arrows of different sizes, ie, small arrow, medium arrow, and large arrow, can be displayed by light emission. ” can be illuminated to indicate that the expected value is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the lower movable production unit 3100 is in a lowered position in which the lower central elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110 in the lower central production unit 3120 as shown in FIG. , and the four rotary decorations 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are positioned so as to contact the upper end of the lower front central decoration 3111 in a front view.

In addition, in the normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side elevating base 3151 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front. The left side rotary decoration 3153 is separated leftward from the lower central effect unit 3120 via the slider, and is located at a retracted position where about half of it is below the left subside rotary decoration 3155, and the left subside rotary decoration 3155 is in the game. It is located in the vicinity of the left end near the bottom from the center in the vertical direction in the region 5a.

Furthermore, in the normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side elevating base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front. The right side rotary decoration 3173 is separated rightward from the lower central effect unit 3120 via the slider, and is located at a retracted position where about half of it is below the right subside rotary decoration 3175, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is in the game. It is located in the vicinity of the right end near the bottom from the center in the vertical direction in the area 5a.

In this normal state, as one of the effects provided to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special According to the result of the lottery, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the decorative parts 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 whose rotation is stopped are combined. is visually recognized by the player. Thereby, depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, the player can feel nervous and excited, and can enjoy the movable presentation by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126.例文帳に追加

When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. to emit light to decorate the lower front center decoration body 3111 of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 positioned in front.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 137, a downward arrow is illuminated by the lower front central decorative body 3111, so that the player's line of sight is directed downward to the game area 5a by the illumination display of the downward arrow. It is possible to guide the player to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the above, to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and to easily make the player participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance and suppress the decline in interest.

Alternatively, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lower central lifting base 3121 Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. As well as being able to surprise the player, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and a combination of decorative parts 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 whose rotation is stopped is given to the player. make visible. As a result, when the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination for the player, a "jackpot" (advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (sometimes referred to as a "jackpot game state") is achieved. It can be made to think that it must be a lottery result that generates a lottery result), and the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, and the expectation for the lottery result. can be raised. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfies a predetermined condition, the plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the ascending lower central elevating base 3121 The LEDs are caused to emit light, and the lower rear central decorative body 3122 arranged in front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are decorated with light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, a large downward arrow is luminously displayed by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111. By luminous display of the large downward arrow, the game is played. The player's line of sight can be guided to the production operation section 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be operated by light emission display of a large arrow. By operating, it is possible to make the player think that it will be a "big hit", and the player can be made to operate the performance operation section 301 to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. As well as being able to surprise the player, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. Next, after sliding the left and right side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and right side rotating decorative bodies 3173 to the appearance positions on the central side, the respective lower left side lifting bases 3151 and lower right side lifting bases 3171 are respectively slid. Raise to raised position (see Figure 139). As a result, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that the lottery result is a "big win", thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game. After that, after rotating the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, the rotation is stopped. The decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotary decoration 3155, the decoration part 3154 of the left-side rotary decoration 3153, the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotary decorations 3126, the decoration part 3174 of the right-side rotary decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotary decoration The player is made to visually recognize the combination of the decoration part 3176 of the body 3175 . At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 decorated with numbers, by stopping the rotation so that the decorative portions 3127 with numbers face forward, the countdown can be started. The countdown effect makes the player think that the result of the lottery must be a ``jackpot'', thereby enhancing the interest in the game. When the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 stop rotating and the countdown ends, The lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are decorated with light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 139, an even larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is displayed by light emission, so that the player can operate the effect operation section 301 arranged at the tip of the giant arrow. , it is possible to convince the player that the lottery result is a ``big win'', and the player can be made to operate the presentation operation section 301 without fail. When this giant arrow is illuminated, a message explaining the effect operation section 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 is raised, and the effect operation part 301 is rotated. Rotate the operation unit 302 at high speed (see FIG. 140). As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the interest of the player can be increased, so that the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed, and the player is entertained and the interest is lowered. can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. The player is informed that the higher the rotational speed of the part 302, the higher the expected value of a "big hit". In other words, the expected value is represented by the rotational speed of the rotary operation unit 302, and the effect display device 1600 displays the effect image for informing the player of the expected value.

On the other hand, in FIG. 140, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to display an effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301, in which the player's operation is prompted by an "arrow" illuminated by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like. Specifically, effects images such as "Push the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial left!", "Turn the dial right!", etc. are displayed. As a result, it is possible to accurately perform the operation on the performance operation section 301, and to surely enjoy the player-participation type performance that operates the performance operation section 301. - 特許庁

Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect image may be used to display the expected value of the "big hit". Using four rotating decorations 3126, a left side rotating decoration 3153, a left subside rotating decoration 3155, a right side rotating decoration 3173, and a right subside rotating decoration 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape, the expected value is calculated. You may make it display.

As a display of expected values using four dice-shaped rotary decorations 3126, left side rotary decoration 3153, left subside rotary decoration 3155, right side rotary decoration 3173, and right subside rotary decoration 3175. is a combination of each decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156, decoration part 3174, and decoration part 3176 that face the front by rotating and stopping, and produces an effect of displaying the expected value of "big hit". . Specifically, when using only the four rotary decorations 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center, there are, for example, the following three patterns. The pattern a1 displays the expected value in a state in which the combination of the decorative parts 3127 facing the front when the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is a random combination in which the player cannot read the meaning. no pattern. Pattern a2 has a relatively high expected value in a state in which each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front and the combination of decorative parts 3127 is "C", "C", "N", and "S". A pattern indicating that Pattern a3 has a very high expected value, in which each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative parts 3127 is "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". A pattern indicating that In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the patterns displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern a1, pattern a2, and pattern a3.

Furthermore, as an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 ( Eight) dice-shaped rotating bodies are used, and the combination of the decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, the decoration part 3156, the decoration part 3174, and the decoration part 3176 displays the expected value of "big hit". You can do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. The pattern b1 is a random combination of the decorative portions 3127, 3154, 3156, 3174, and 3176 whose rotation is stopped (no display of expected values). In pattern b2, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!" A combination of "!" or "o" for the right side rotary decoration 3173 and "o" or "star" for the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 (chance display). In pattern b3, the left side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!" A combination of "!" or "凰" for the right-side rotary decoration 3173, and "凰" or "STAR" for the right-side rotary decoration 3175 (Gekiatsu display). In pattern b4, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "chi", "cha", "n" and "su". ”, the right side rotary decoration 3173 is “!”, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is a combination of “凰” or “STAR” (super chance display). In pattern b5, the left side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". ”, the right-side rotary decoration 3173 is “!”, and the right-side rotary decoration 3175 is “凰” or “星” (Super Gekiatsu display). In pattern b6, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "Congratulations", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!", the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "O", "Me", "De", and "To", and the right side is A combination of "U" for the rotary decoration 3173 and "!!" In this way, it is displayed by stopping the rotation of the eight rotating bodies: the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. The expected value can be displayed according to the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In addition, in the above-described effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after being prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, the effect of displaying the expected value described above is not performed. The luminous display of "arrow" is also extinguished. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after being prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, the remaining effect time is used to continuously perform the effect of displaying the above-described expected value. When the effect time ends, the above-described effect ends, and the light emitting display of the "arrow" is extinguished, and the effect ends.

Thus, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of B), the four rotating decorations 3126 aligned left and right on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 rotate, or the lower center The four rotary decorations 3126 aligned to the left and right by the lifting base 3121 rise together with the lower rear center decoration 3122, or the four rotary decorations 3126 raised by the lower center lifting base 3121 rotate, and the lower left A pair of left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotating decorative body 3173 are slid in the horizontal direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). The left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 rotate by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. , so that the player can see the movable effects such as the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorative bodies 3126), the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the left sub-side rotating decoration body. The decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 can be noticed, and the movement performance by them can be enjoyed.

In addition, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned at the lower end, the lower rear central decoration 3122 is illuminated and the lower front central decoration 3111 is illuminated to display a downward arrow or elevate the lower center. By raising the base 3121 and illuminating the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 with a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration board, a large downward arrow can be illuminated, or a pair of lower left sides can be raised and lowered. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be displayed by light emission. The player can be entertained by the effect, and the player's line of sight can be guided to the downward direction of the effect operation part 301 by the illuminated downward arrow, and the player can operate the effect operation part 301. can encourage In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to participate in the player participation type effect. and entertain.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to provide various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to anticipate the performance pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected performance. can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the lower front-center decoration 3111, the lower rear-center decoration 3122, the lower left-side decoration 3152, the lower right-side decoration 3172, and the like emit light to indicate a downward arrow, so that the player can see the downward arrow. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous. By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of and the effect operation unit 301, the player can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player participation type effect by operating the effect operation unit 301. The effect operation section 301 can be easily operated, and the player's participatory effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9-2. Upper rear movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part of the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner inside the back box 3010 and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner inside the back box 3010 .

The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 has a left base 3211 mounted inside the back box 3010, and can be slid diagonally from the upper left to the lower right on the left base 3211, although detailed illustration is omitted. A left slider 3212 attached, a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, an upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with its rotational axis directed forward and backward, an upper rear A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the left drive motor 3214 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214, and a drive gear 3215 having a spur gear shape connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. , a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the driving gear 3215 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a first transmission gear 3216 meshing and rotatably attached to the left base 3211. a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217, a third transmission gear 3218 meshing with the second transmission gear 3217 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, a third transmission gear 3218 and a rack gear 3213 and a spur-like pinion gear 3219 that meshes with each other and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211 .

In addition, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and has a flat upper rear left decoration 3220 extending in the left and right direction, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and has a front surface. and an upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decoration 3220 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper rear left unit 3210 can move the upper rear left decoration 3220 up and down via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left driving motor 3214 .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 attached in the back box 3010 and to the right base 3231 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from upper right to lower left. a straight rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232; an upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with its rotational axis facing forward and backward; A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234; A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 meshing with the drive gear 3235 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, a third transmission gear 3238 meshing with the second transmission gear 3237 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, a third transmission gear 3238 and a rack gear 3233, respectively and a spur-like pinion gear 3239 that meshes with and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 .

In addition, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and has a flat plate-shaped upper rear right decoration 3240 extending in the left and right direction, and the upper rear right decoration 3240 is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right decoration and is attached to the front surface. and an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decoration 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 up and down via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234 .

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical storage case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251. An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a in which the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252 is inserted in the storage case 3251 with a gap in the circumferential direction. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so that the distance between them and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrower as they approach the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 protruding from the storage case 3251. , a plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between a plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the storage case 3251. A main body housing 3256 having a tightening spring 3255 that tightens from the outside, a housing recess 3256a that houses the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and that is attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231; A lid member 3257 that closes a housing recess 3256a of the output member 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 penetrates; (See FIGS. 145(a)-(c)).

In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 or the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the plurality of projecting portions 3252a of the input member 3252 engage the circumferential ends of the transmission grooves 3253a of the output member 3253. As a result, the output member 3253 rotates, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side as it is.

In addition, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 via the output shaft 3253c from the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 side, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves toward the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is caught in the space. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 side is transmitted via the input member 3252 to the upper rear side. There is no transmission to the left drive motor 3214 or upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if gravity acts to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward, the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output member 3253 . Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 do not move downward without permission, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at arbitrary positions.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the storage case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the storage case 3251 are housed in the storage recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined amount, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 ), the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts against the projection 3252 a of the input member 3252 , and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, and the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 145(d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 may be biased by the lock spring 3260 toward the protruding portion 3252a close to them. As a result, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 . The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from the action of rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side until the lock is applied is can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is, in a normal state, positioned above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 are in a non-driving state, respectively. , the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253, and the upper The rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 do not move downward without permission.

Accordingly, in order to prevent the downward movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. There is no need to provide an electric lock mechanism for blocking the pachinko machine 1, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving freely. Even if vibrations and accelerations are applied in such a case, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the origin state at the time of shipment, and unnecessary origin adjustment is not required. It is possible to reduce the labor involved in installing the game board 5, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right driving motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are moved obliquely downward toward the center through the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 is moved. and the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 abut to form one large decoration (see FIG. 143). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the front upper portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of the decorations 3240), vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable decorations, etc., and the left slider 3212, right slider 3232, and upper Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the output The cam surface 3253b of the member 3253 presses the roller 3254 toward the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the output member 3253 side (upper rear side) is pushed. Transmission of rotation from the left ornament 3220 side and the upper rear right ornament 3240 side to the upper rear left driving motor 3214 side and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 side is cut off, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending freely, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved unexpectedly through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. To prevent movement (falling) and to avoid unintended movement of an upper rear left decoration body 3220 and an upper rear right decoration body 3240, thereby giving a player a sense of distrust. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, so that the left slider 3212 and Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. A player can be shown a variety of performance patterns of lifting and stopping at a position, and the player is hardly bored with the movable performance of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decoration body 3240 can be stopped. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and it is possible to prevent early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload. Disturbance of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be avoided to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145(d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging toward the protruding portion 3252a close to each of them, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately applied. can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is locked after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until such time can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are respectively moved downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, a large decorative body can be formed by combining them to give a strong impact to the player, thereby making the player happy. At the same time, the appearance of the large decoration can make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot game") in which the player has an advantage will occur, and expectations for the game can be made. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by enhancing the feeling. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other, the mutual contact causes the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to move. However, since each has a clutch mechanism 3250, a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (to rotate from the output side). Even if the force is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, thereby locking the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented by contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body can be prevented from moving by contact with each other. The return of the 3240 can also be prevented, and the movable effect of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 contacting and uniting can be surely enjoyed by the player and the decline of interest can be suppressed. .

In the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated to press the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force to rotate the storage case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254 , the force (torque) to rotate the storage case 3251 becomes frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255 . If it is larger than , a slip occurs between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, causing the storage case 3251 to rotate. When the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via a plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, and the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the above-described actions and effects from occurring.

[5-9-3. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600 in the front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 includes a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part of the back box 3010, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be vertically movable. and an upper front movable decorative body 3350 which is driven by an upper front drive motor 3302 and moves up and down.

The upper front movable decoration 3350 includes a circular center decoration 3351 attached to the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction (downward). A pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a are connected to each other and attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting decoration 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a arranged on both left and right sides of the central decoration 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a are connected to each other. It has a second connecting rod 3353b coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first projecting decoration 3352 and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the central decoration 3351 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. and a second protruding decorative body 3353.

The first decorative projecting body 3352 has a pair of first decorative projecting parts 3352a formed in the shape of an isosceles triangle protruding long with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of first decorative projections 3352a, the first decorative projection 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged behind the first decorative projection 3352a on the left side in the front-rear direction. The first projecting decoration 3352 has a link attachment portion 3352c to which the tip of the right second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably attached to the tip of the right first projecting decoration 3352a.

The second projecting decorative body 3353 has a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a formed in the shape of a long projected isosceles triangle with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. As for the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a in the front-rear direction. The second projecting decoration 3353 has a link attachment portion 3353c to which the tip of the left second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably attached to the tip of the left second projecting decoration 3353a.

In the upper front movable decoration 3350, the first protruding decoration 3352a of the first protruding decoration 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353a of the second protruding decoration 3353 are formed to have the same shape and size. there is The upper front movable decoration 3350 has the left second projecting decoration 3353a behind the left first projecting decoration 3352a, and the right first projecting decoration 3352a behind the right second projecting decoration 3353a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Although not shown, the upper front movable decoration 3350 has a central decoration 3351, a pair of first projecting decorations 3352a, and a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a on the rear side, and a plurality of LEDs on the front. is mounted on the upper front center decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board. The second protruding decoration parts 3353a can be independently decorated with light.

In addition, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 at symmetrical positions with respect to the center of the front surface in the left-right direction, and is rotatable around an axis extending back and forth at the base end. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a bar shape, and a base end side attached to each tip of the pair of first link rods 3303 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a tip side protruding firstly. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353, respectively, around the longitudinally extending axis, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. and an upper stopper 3305 for restricting upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 for restricting downward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 130 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is positioned near the left-right upper end of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 147(a)). In this normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize them as one decoration. In addition, in a normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 As a result, the central decoration 3351 moves downward together with the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 and the upper front movable decoration 3350 as a whole. At this time, the first decorative projecting body 3352 and the second decorative projecting body 3353 move downward while remaining horizontally extended. By moving these first protruding decorative body 3352 and second protruding decorative body 3353 downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link mounting part 3352c of the right first protruding decorative part 3352a and the left side The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a moves downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to the tips of the second link rods 3304. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating with the downward movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350 (central decoration 3351) come into contact with the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is blocked. state (see FIG. 147(b)). After the pair of first link rods 3303 abut against the lower stoppers 3306, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward, the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a Since downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are positioned at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b ( The center of the central decoration 3351) rotates in the direction in which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached move downward. (See FIG. 147(c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so as to open the scissors. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged to surprise the player and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Thus, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 of the upper front movable decoration 3350 are overlapped in the front and rear to form one decoration. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and second protruding decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that the tips are separated from each other. A player who recognizes it as one decoration can be surprised, and the movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350 can be enjoyed.

Further, by the action of the first link bar 3303 and the second link bar 3304, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 can be moved to the central decoration 3351 simply by moving the upper front movable decoration 3350 downward. Since they can be opened by rotating them in directions opposite to each other around , there is no need to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first and second projecting decorations 3352 and 3353 .

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152. FIG. 148 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 149 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 150 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 151 is line XX of FIG. 152 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 . Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a transparent cover body 1501 having an open rear side and a box shape longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit for controlling the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of performance based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. , a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of a metal shield plate 1540, and a transparent base body 1502 closing the opening of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540 in the inner space of the cover body 1501, thereby forming a shield plate 1540. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by covering the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502 .

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, and peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. properly connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin and molded transparently, and covers the upper, left, lower and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover plate 1501a (thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e protrude rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape with an opening.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is slightly upper right in the center, and the air cooling fan FAN is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, predetermined column-shaped through holes th1 to th4 are inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal seated pan head screws (screws having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) are screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned along its lower side by 1 position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The connector concave portion 1501ac is defined as two closed substantially horizontally long rectangular regions (more precisely, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). there is Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. and are exposed from the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the plugs are hidden by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a above the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, they will not adhere to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. can be prevented.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has, along its lower side, one closed oblong rectangular area corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of connector recess 1501ac to the surface of cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a above the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, they can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It's like

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed along the left side of the cover plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the front. A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and molded transparently.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral control Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 .

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. placed like this. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced by the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned with each other. , so as to be aligned with mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In this state, among the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition to the contact state, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are brought into contact with each other. Also, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output The ground (GND) of the substrate 1530 and the circuit earth are to be connected. Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the ground (GND) lines of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and thus to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 . .

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. It is The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is formed on the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwing them toward mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, A peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . In this state, land 1520rf4 among lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the rear surface of L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of metal shield plate 1540. Also, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. be in contact. Also, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output The ground (GND) of the substrate 1530 and the circuit earth are to be connected. Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the ground (GND) lines of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 . Become.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. The rear surface of the fixed peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 for soldering having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and liquid crystal output Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1530 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the liquid crystal is displayed. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be circuit grounded to 1530 ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM The ground (GND) of the substrate 1520 and the circuit earth are to be connected. Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the ground (GND) lines of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and thus to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 . .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening-side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa have a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension. (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By drawing in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected to each other. A gap is formed, and a gap is also formed between the volume control switch 1510 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501 ac 8 formed in the cover body 1501 . Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501 Gaps formed in connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, gaps formed in volume control switch 1510d provided in peripheral control board 1510, volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in cover body 1501, and liquid crystal output board 1530. The two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gap formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arcuate slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, gaps formed in the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, volume control switches 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, , a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. , and the area in the gap formed in ) are smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is allowed to pass through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of shield plates 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

[6-2. Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of non-conductive resin and molded transparently. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a has wirings for the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7. Disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken due to the bending of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the force when inserting the connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at a position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, or the force when operating the volume control switch 1510d An elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

In addition, the base plate 1502a has an L-shaped circuit at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, on the right side when viewed from the front. A vertically elongated rectangular through-hole 1502ab is formed which is one size larger than the rear surface of the ground piece 1540d.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center left side and lower center left side of the flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). are formed respectively.

In addition, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and are located at the center of the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). Between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, 25 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the rear surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d from its upper end to its lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a. The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a without coming into contact therewith.

The metal shield plate 1540 is bent so that the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane, The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel surfaces. In this embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. The mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. This is one mounting boss hole out of a pair of formed mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. These mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and extend from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 as described above. These are two mounting boss holes out of four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 protruding from each other.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, a predetermined distance dimension (this embodiment In the form, a space having a width of 14.8 mm is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (12 mm in this embodiment), and a second space between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later (see FIG. 151). and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC not illustrated, backup power source 1510e described later, power source generation circuit not illustrated, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), LEDML1 to ML4 (to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 (to be described later), etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), A special connector SCN3, etc., to be described later) and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (resistors, not shown, capacitors, not shown, a special connector SCN4, etc., to be described later) are housed therein. Doesn't contain any electronic components. By accommodating various electronic components that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the electronic components. In other words, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise.

Shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540 is formed with ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501, respectively. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. there is When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recesses 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of peripheral control unit 1500 through ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 and through ventilation holes 1540az formed in shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). It is composed of a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c applied to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester fabric on which a copper and nickel metal film is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive covering portion 1545a to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces. etc. are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting), and the progress of effects. A control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data in advance, and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is cut off, and various other components. It is provided with a power source generation circuit (not shown) that generates a power source voltage and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, ROM 1510b, and SDRAM 1510c provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a reduced pin spacing and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. ~ CN7, the pin spacing of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased. ing.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is used as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed through the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, communication via connector CN6 or connector CN7 ), and an electric drive source provided on the side of the door frame 3 (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300, and communicate via the connector CN3. ), and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, lower movable effect unit 3100, upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and upper front movable effect unit 3300 , and communicates via the connector CN6.), or receive signals from the door frame 3 side as detection data, or various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the production operation unit 300 and communicates via the connector CN3) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate of SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate of I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Moreover, in this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from GPIO based on this clock signal. It can produce serial data. By using such GPIO to function as serial communication, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side (Communicating via the connector CN1.) can output light emission data as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (communicating via the connector CN6) ), the light emission data can be transmitted through a plurality of serial lines on the door frame side.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . The liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+35 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, as will be described later. LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state of DC +5V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +5V being supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state of DC +35V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +35V being supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (12 mm in this embodiment), and a first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of 2 predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The interior of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, and the special connectors SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connectors SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) direction), and is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is connected to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 should not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Moreover, a gap is formed between the front face (upper face) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back face of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (in the direction of the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), the structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is set in a state in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control 1510), the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of connector SCN4 and the rear surface of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 .

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce costs, contribute to a reduction in power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520 a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. After pressing in, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above is adopted. By doing so, a plurality of connecting terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be absorbed by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. can be prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be reliably formed.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the design dimension distance tolerance is satisfied. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the effect (for example, to the player). An image to convey that a jackpot game state more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important substrate for drawing an image such as an image that tells you that you are approaching. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has its special connector SCN4 socket inserted into the special connector SCN2 plug of the peripheral control board 1510 . Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a after pushing it in, the special connector SCN4 socket provided with the floating mechanism described above is adopted. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are absorbed in the back-and-forth direction error caused when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent breakage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the design dimension distance tolerance is satisfied. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[6-6. Assembling method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, a through hole 1540c1a is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. A state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is achieved.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It will be in a state of being clamped and fixed between the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a are absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. , the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the body 1501 is covered, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Then, a metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other. In this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) to the rear surface of the is 6.8 mm.

In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, for connecting a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 through the wire lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 respectively from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear, whereby the wiring cover body is assembled. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (bonded).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the attachment portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. , when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to attach the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the .

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this picture-frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. are connected to the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit ground piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is collapsed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerance or assembly error. can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545 . As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is established. Since it can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 and the like and can be the same ground (GND), an environment strong against electromagnetic noise can be constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. can be done.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged to align with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side). ), and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the cover body 1501 seen from the rear surface). 1501), the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). In the procedure for mounting various substrates as described above, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when the plugs and sockets are pushed in can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). In addition, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are, for example, multiple types of methods of video signals input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is employed, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded. 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. For this reason, electromagnetic noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is blocked through the metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit ground (GND) of various substrates and the ground of the power supply substrate 630. (GND), and from the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can be done.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of checking the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 1510, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., direction of the IC, part number , pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. 1510b, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm the modification of the control ROM 1510b through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are used to check the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 2, an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is designed to keep the lighting state while the DC +35V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. 2, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilating holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 , and so that the states of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles, the areas are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. are placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (12 mm in this embodiment), and a first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of 2 predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has luster, and the area of the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. and its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting section capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and directing it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be further coated with glossy colored paint.

4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball paths formed by these and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above, and the inner space of the cover body 1501 is configured. In addition, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various boards. By fixing the metal shield plate 1540 electrically to the ground (GND) of various substrates, a circuit earth configuration is adopted. In this embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. (GND) line and the same ground (GND) is used.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Electromagnetic wave noise entering from the body 1502 is filtered through a metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit earth, the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the power supply. The ground (GND) of the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102(b) can be led to the ground of the game hall island facility and removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Electromagnetic wave noise entering from the body 1502 can be eliminated by guiding it from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall as a circuit ground called circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540 .

4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided on 1520 and the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. , so that it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553 . As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. By arranging the inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-described inter-board connector.

In addition, a board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The board-to-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). 150, since it can be arranged to be elongated in the vertical direction, it is possible to minimize the area to which dust, metallic powder, etc. adhere. When the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged to be elongated in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, metallic powder, or the like adheres greatly increases. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are elongated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is covered by the protruding wall of the cover plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, metallic powder, or the like adhered to the connector falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. In order to prevent dust, metallic powder, etc. from adhering to the respective electrical terminals, the direction in which the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged, the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, is selected.

Incidentally, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and an effect control board, etc., on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the effect control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device and manufacture it, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

In addition, conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and a production control board (production control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. A gaming machine has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity when they rub against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310 . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2511, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003, and a first big winning opening 2005. A first big winning hole sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, a second big winning hole sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, and a fraudulent magnetism in the game area 5a. Detection signals from the magnetic sensor 3003, etc. are input to the main control I/O port via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby controlling the starting solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid. 2516, the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the normal pattern display, the normal reservation display, the first special pattern display, the first special reservation number display, A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first grand prize sensor 2512, and the second grand prize winner sensor 2513 are provided with non-contact type electromagnetic sensors. A contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001, whereas a proximity switch of the type is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2511 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , The detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2512 and the second big winning hole sensor 2513 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first big winning slot sensor 2512 and the second big winning slot sensor 2513 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control I/O port. In addition, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control I/O port of the main control MPU, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. It has a control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner at the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection from the ball cut detection sensor 574 A signal, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I/O port through the payout control input circuit.

A detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent to the payout control input circuit via a payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I/O port of the MPU.

A detection signal from a door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from a main body frame open switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to a payout control input circuit. to the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. to output a signal from the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control I/O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 from the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU. . In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 . The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces. is integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b pre-stores various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown). It has a backup power source 1510e capable of supplying power even at times, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports, various parallel I/O ports, and the like.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored after a power failure). Control to transfer. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, as described above, the transfer speed is 2 Gbps. transferred at high speed. The control information (peripheral data) includes, as described above, image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and data provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted on various decorative substrates, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game It is driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided on the board 5 .

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to proceed with the effect. .

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw images on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are performed. Various performances are progressed by performing control such that sound such as music and sound effects in accordance with various performances flows.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and outputs the drawing data to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Control output. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. FIG.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates and outputs the sound data, thereby generating vibration speakers provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, outputs an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and stores the read schedule data. , the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and various serial I Game board side drive data for transmitting to each decoration board of the game board 5 from the /O port and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 are stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is read out and sent from various serial I/O ports to each drive board that drives the drive motor and/or drive solenoid of the game board 5, the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, and the operation button elevation drive motor Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to 367, etc., and door-side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals for color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Light emission data and light emission data for door side driving are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the door frame 3 side from various serial I/O ports.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via circuits. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via circuits. Also, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that transmit the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power generation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 converts one of the various voltages from the power supply board 630 (for example, DC +12 V) into a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510. We produce and supply types.

The peripheral control IC 1510a has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame grounding substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 can collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places once and ground it to the island facility of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground line by the frame ground board 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 154A and 154B are side views of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 154B is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 154(a), the frame ground board 559 is mounted with its mounting surface facing downward (that is, with the connector insertion openings of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 facing downward). It is accommodated and mounted inside a substrate accommodating portion 551aa formed in the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 shown in FIG. 102(b).

As shown in FIG. 154(b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly describing the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. The connection terminal is electrically connected to the interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 serves as the island equipment ground and is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire. The ground terminal ECN3 is provided as a ball tank ground on the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. One end of the sphere-tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that does not attach to the sphere-tank ground wire, and the other end of this sphere-tank ground wire is electrically connected. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 with a metal screw (not shown), The other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN5 serves as a power source ground, and is provided on the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal through the power ground wire.

As shown in FIG. 154(c), the circuit of the frame ground board 559 is such that the ground terminal ECN3 as the sphere tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is used as the power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. In addition, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

Electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground is removed by being guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed by the ground as the ball tank ground. Electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. Electromagnetic noise is removed by being guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is removed from the island equipment. Through the ground terminal ECN2 as a ground and the island facility ground wire, it is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560 and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the game balls B are supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560 . The game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and emits electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is arranged near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, and as a result of which static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 and the payout unit are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame earth substrate 559, the earth terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the body frame metal The earth terminal ECN4 as a ground is gradually passed through the resistors ER1 and ER2 to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise, thereby suppressing the instantaneous discharge of the high voltage, and the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is connected to the island facility. It can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate is transferred from the frame ground board 559 through the sphere tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed.

On the other hand, when electromagnetic wave noise enters metal shield plate 1540 housed in peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. It penetrates into the ground (GND) line, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and flows from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground on the frame ground board 559 via the power supply ground wire. It is designed to be guided from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire and removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Electromagnetic wave noise entering from the body 1502 is led from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit ground called circuit ground, thereby reaching the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1501 and the base body 1502, the electromagnetic noise can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

In this embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are located in a region strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as described above. (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is used to prevent electromagnetic noise that has flowed into the frame ground board 559 from the game hall, as described above. A large ground terminal is used because it is to be removed by leading to the ground of the island facility. The earth terminals ECN2 to ECN4, which employ this large earth terminal, have a square cross-sectional shape with one side of 1.14 mm, rated current: 7 A (when using AC/DC, AWG#18), rated voltage: 250 V (AC/DC), applicable wire range: AWG #22 to #18, and has a general specification of 13.4 mm in height (earth terminal ECN2 to When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as a power supply ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. As for the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are employed. The earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small earth terminal have a square cross-sectional shape with one side of 0.64 mm, rated current: 3 A (when using AC/DC, AWG#22), rated voltage: 250V (AC/DC), applicable wire range: AWG #30 to #22, and as shown in FIG. When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

In this embodiment, the ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is larger than the ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) that are connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, the ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The ground wire, body frame ground wire) is thicker than the ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 is 1.6 mm, as shown in FIG. 154(a).

In this way, the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is temporarily collected on the frame grounding substrate 559 and guided from the frame grounding substrate 559 to the grounding of the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of removing electricity.

In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected once on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be used. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is temporarily collected on the power supply board 630 to make the island equipment of the game hall. Compared to the configuration of leading to the ground and removing it, the routing of the ground wire (wiring) becomes extremely simple.

In addition, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame grounding substrate 559 are configured to be arranged in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in close proximity, a plurality of wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 can be connected. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, 10 external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 are arranged in a row from the left side to the right side of the dispensing base unit 550 when viewed from behind).) ) and the hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth in the frame earth board 559, and the earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall. , can be performed as a series of operations, such as the work of electrically connecting , with the island facility ground wire (wiring), which contributes to the improvement of workability.

In addition, since the frame ground board 559 is configured to be able to be arranged in the board accommodation portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island facility of the game hall are connected. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, the production , peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 which are electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the peripheral control board 1510). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like provided for.

In addition, by arranging the frame ground board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. For the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, in the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground are respectively provided. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. can be done.

In addition, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the payout unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting the static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the sphere tank ground wire (wiring) is determined by the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the static elimination action, and the length of the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination. It can be configured to be the shortest length compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

In addition, by arranging the frame ground board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. For the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, in the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground are Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected. It can be removed by leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire.

By the way, conventionally, as disclosed in , each ground is once aggregated to the power board placed on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so as to easily supply the CR unit power supply AC 24V, and through the power board A gaming machine has been proposed that is grounded by connecting to the ground of the island facility (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged at the bottom of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to collect the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank, the prize ball device, etc. on the upper part of the game machine toward the power supply board below. By routing the ground wire in this manner, there is a risk that electromagnetic noise will be transmitted to various control boards located along the way, resulting in an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if there is a problem with the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, the operation of the power supply board may be affected by the current flowing through the ground wire. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island equipment is located above the gaming machine, the grounding wire aggregated on the power supply board must be rerouted from the bottom to the top for connection, which is sometimes complicated.

[9. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159. FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 157 is a view of FIG. FIG. 159 shows silk printing of electronic parts printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate (part 2). Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate will be described, followed by a description of a method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, and a confirmation of blown fuses.

As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V game machine power supply voltage. AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board 630 when the plug of the power cord (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the game machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc.) from AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. are doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 155, the circuit of the power supply board 630 mainly comprises a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power destruction circuit 630g. It is

AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power wire connector DCN1 through a power cord (not shown). AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power line (not shown), and the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a is connected to a 24V AC line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1"), and the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a is connected to a 24V AC line 2. (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2") is input. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC 24V1 is sent to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As soon as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As the supply is interrupted, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC 24V2 to various circuits of the power supply board 630 is interrupted. As a result, power to the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

While the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be powered off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise countermeasure circuit]
The noise suppression circuit 630b includes a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 through the power switch 630a. electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is through the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input as the frame ground FG2 to the ground connection terminal DCN5. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 154 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

A normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through a power switch 630a.

AC 24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC 24VA. 24 VAC output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as 24 VAC. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power line (not shown). 24VA and 24V AC are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. A peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and Zener diodes.

The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC 24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FETQ1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified into direct current through switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 are output respectively. The package type of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 is a so-called TO-220F, which is the same type and is fixed to heat sink fin HS1 (see FIG. 156). ing. The heat radiation fins HS1 are soldered and fixed to the power supply substrate 630 so as to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 .

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. are respectively output from and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q3 and Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. A peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and inductors.

The DC whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. are entered respectively. The gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 receive the gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

The direct current, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2, suppresses the generation of harmonics by switching with the FETs Q3, Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da, improves the power factor, and reaches the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10. are output from respectively. The package type of the FETs Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 156). The heat radiation fins HS2 are soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 .

The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminals are supplied with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smoothes) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generating circuit 630f. It has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm. Then, it is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as DC +35V. The power line supplied through the fuse FUSE3 becomes the +35V power line for each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply generation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates DC +12 V and DC +5 V from the input DC. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and also outputs the generated DC +5V from the +5V terminal and outputs it from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +12V power supply line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power supply production circuit 630f becomes the +5V power supply for each board inside the pachinko machine 1. power line.

The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor improvement circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by controlling output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC 24V1 and AC 24V2, the common mode noise of which is reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a gate signal for the power destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for game machines in the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for game machines. When it is inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC +35 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The power generation circuit 630f is based on the power supply voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1. is set to approximately 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breaking circuit can be output to the power supply breaking circuit 630g.

When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power destruction circuit to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply breaking circuit 630g enters the short mode and the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifying circuit 630c, and the power supply breaking circuit 630g. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, blowing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by flowing the current all at once toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f.

A GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630 f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 . The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded serves as the ground (GND) line of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 .

[9-1-6. power supply destruction circuit]
The power breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to cathode terminals 2 of Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. , the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected in addition to the other end of the resistor R25.

In the power breaking circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power breaking circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FETQ5 via the resistor R25, the FETQ5 is activated and the drain terminal of the FETQ5 is changed to the source terminal. (The drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 become overcurrent), and the FETQ5 is destroyed, thereby maintaining the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are conductive. be done. The package type of FETQ5 is the same as that of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above). , Q2, Q3, Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions not in contact with the radiating fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 156 and 157). The purpose of this is to cool down the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 by absorbing the heat through the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (an overcurrent occurs between the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5), the FETQ5 is shorted by heat generation. This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When it is plugged in, the power generation circuit 630f adjusts the magnitude of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value (threshold : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50V.), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FETQ5 are electrically connected is maintained, and the source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are turned ON, the currents flowing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 pass through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5, which is in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, to the power generation circuit 630f. A large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, blowing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Even if it is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. In the state where FETQ5 of the power destruction circuit 630g was destroyed by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 were replaced, and the plug of the power cord was inserted into the power outlet of AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall. However, since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g A large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f via the FETQ5 in the short mode state in the , a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are closed. It will be fused again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord must be replaced with the island equipment of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine, the game cannot be started.

[9-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. Electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include FETs Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, FETs Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the power factor correction circuit 630d, as described above. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length: 5 mm). Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic parts that cannot be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic part that is destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, only electrons that destroy In order to make it easier to identify the components, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the others.

Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that cannot be destroyed, have white outlines as shown in FIG. 158(a). A line and a thick white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged are silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 . The thick white line is the side fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 156, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1, HS2. HS2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the silk-printed white outline line on which HS2 is arranged and the thick white line portions of the silk-printed TSLK1 to 8 are connected to each other.

On the other hand, for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. Ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged are printed as a silk print, and a silk print TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 . That is, the white oblique line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 Among TSLKs 1 to 9, by visually observing the white oblique line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is observed compared to other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. As a result, it is possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that will be destroyed among the different types of electronic components having the same shape.

Also, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white oblique lines ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for , the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so it is easy to communicate with the staff of the service center and the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall. Become.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the clerk of the game hall, etc., on the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall, etc., follows the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. FIG. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 of interest can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

As described above, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a type of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is AC 100V, which is higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for game machines. , the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed as described above to maintain the short mode, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed. melts. In other words, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3, and then one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 are destroyed as traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage. there is Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 is printed so that the electronic component to be destroyed can be easily identified. We adopt silk printing that has characteristics different from others.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that will not be destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is colored white. A silk print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as a silk print.

On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. 159(b). , silk prints FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as a silk print including a white outline and a solid white area ad2 within the outline. That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown). The region ad2 is visible, and the solid white region ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the region inside the white outline, is transparent. Visual observation is ensured through a transparent glass tube.

In this way, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, the white color that is represented as a characteristic pattern By visually checking the area ad2 painted solidly, it is possible to identify which electronic component among the electronic components of the same type and having the same shape is the electronic component to which attention should be paid in comparison with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape shows a trace that the plug of the power cord was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. can be specified.

Also, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone, the solid white area represented by the characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 having ad2, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. It becomes easier to communicate with a staff member such as a store clerk.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone to set the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall will notify the person in charge of the service center. , the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3, which is another electronic component.

[9-3. Fuse confirmation]
Next, confirmation of fusing of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 of the same type and having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). Soot adheres to the inside of the Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will be fused. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described silk prints FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk prints for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the state of the fused fuse wires can be easily checked. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2 and FSLK3 correspond to the transparent glass tube except for the two ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the area ad2 painted in solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken.

As a result, the plug of the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 can be connected to AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, by a staff member such as a game hall clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 by mistakenly inserting it into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of the power supply, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are traced. Of these, the fuse wires housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes are broken, and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tubes. Even if the plug is inserted into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on, so it must be an initial failure."

On the other hand, as the silk printing for the fuse FUSE3, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as described above. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the power supply board 630 . Further, in the present embodiment, a region of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk printing FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3 is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the solid green resistor corresponding to it (that is, the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the solid green resistor corresponding to it are not laid out at all). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of , no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is done by viewing the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the corresponding area of the solid green resistor through the clear glass tube to see the fuse wire contained in the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3. By improving the visibility of the state of , it is possible to check whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC 24VA and AC 24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 functions not only as means for relaying various signals, but also as means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). 159(a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 is printed on its mounting surface. A region of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out at all in the area of the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green register area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the clear glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) by viewing through the clear glass tube to the area of the corresponding solid green resistor. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse wire, it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided on both. can also

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with power supply means capable of generating various power sources necessary for the game machine based on an external power supply supplied from outside the game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). Publication (Fig. 2) By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone about the specific parts of the power supply means, the person in charge of the service center should follow the instructions. Another problem is that it is difficult to identify a particular component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

[10. Each decorative substrate provided on the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 160 to 164. FIG. FIG. 160 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided on the door frame, FIG. 161 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. It is an enlarged view of the view. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and the frame door sub-relay board will be described, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board equipped with the LED constant current drive circuit, and an LED constant current drive circuit. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 includes the upper left plate decorative body 271, the upper right plate decorative body 276, the upper central plate decorative body 312a, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the side The side window interior decoration part 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are respectively arranged, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish A plate lower left decoration 281, a plate lower right decoration 286, and a plate center lower decoration 312b are arranged below the central upper decoration 312a.

Behind the upper left dish decoration 271, an upper left dish decoration substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper left dish decoration 271 is arranged, and a plurality of upper left dish decoration substrates 273 are mounted. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right plate decoration 276, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper right plate decoration 276 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). Behind the upper plate center decoration 312a, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc shape is arranged along the plate center upper decoration 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

Behind the door frame left side decoration 404, a left side upper decoration substrate 402a and a left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration 404. A door frame left side decorative board 402 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, left side upper decorative board 402a 5, and 10 on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration parts 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and are formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412 behind it. A window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 12 LEDs) mounted on the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 are decorated with light emission. Behind the door frame right side decoration 419, a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame right side decoration 419. A door frame right side decorative board 418 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, right side upper decorative board 418a 4, and 10 on the right side lower decorative substrate 418b).

Behind the door frame top decoration 453, a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 is arranged. A door frame top left decoration board 456 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the left side of the top decoration 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 . A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in a long strip shape is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top center decorative boards 455, door frame top left decorative boards 456, and door frame top right decorative boards 457 are mounted. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 LEDs on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 LEDs on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 LEDs on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are decorated.

Behind the lower left plate decoration 281, a lower left plate decoration substrate 283 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the lower left plate decoration 281 is arranged, and a plurality of lower left plate decoration substrates 283 are mounted. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the lower right plate decoration 286 is disposed a lower right plate decoration substrate 288 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the lower right plate decoration 286 . A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 6 LEDs) are mounted on the LEDs to illuminate and decorate. Behind the lower plate center decoration 312b, a lower plate center decoration substrate 316 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc along the lower plate center decoration 312b is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the rear side. , consists of The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b. In the present embodiment, luminous decoration is provided by 9).

In this way, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, etc. can also be provided.

[10-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, plate lower left decoration board 283, the door frame side decoration substrates such as the lower right plate decoration substrate 288, the lower center plate decoration substrate 316, the front decoration substrate 352a, and the rear decoration substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 148 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, and light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, which are serially output from the there is Further, the door frame secondary relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are relayed to the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the board 214 and is also input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The first serial line on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are connected to the plate lower left decorative board 283, the plate lower right decorative board 288, , and input to the operating portion relay board 392 of the effect operating unit 300 shown in FIG.

The door frame side first serial system (luminescence data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input to the plate upper left decorative board 273, respectively. In other words, the plate lower left decorative board 283 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decorative board 273, thereby The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a string. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 electrically connected to the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 (that is, the last stage of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283) is provided with the lower left plate decoration substrate 283. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. .

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate right lower decorative board 288 are input to the plate right right decorative board 278, respectively. That is, the dish lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a string. The plate lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridging board is supplied with the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, DC +12 V, and ground (GND). An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are shown for outputting to the plate upper right decorative board 278 respectively. There is a connector for output that does not work. On the other hand, the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 electrically connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 (that is, the last stage of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288) is connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from output connectors (not shown) of 288. ing.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation section relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are connected to the plate center upper decorative board 314, the plate It is input to the center lower decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration board 352a are respectively input to the rear decoration board 352b. That is, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. and the post-decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a row. On the front decoration board 352a serving as a bridging board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the operation part relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, DC +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. is provided with an output connector (not shown). On the other hand, a rear decoration board 352b electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, the rear stage and final stage of the front decoration board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) respectively output from.

Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. The plate lower left decorative board 283 has an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dissipation circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y and a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 283c takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, the plate upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input will be briefly described. , the upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dissipation circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to suLED1 to suLED6. The constant-current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door-frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decorative board 283. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

[10-1-2. Door frame side 2nd serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame secondary relay board 105 are connected to the left side lower decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. Along with being input to the substrate 402b, the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. are entered in each.

DC +12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decoration substrate 402b of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decoration substrate 402a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected to the door frame top right decoration board. 457 is entered.

The door frame side second serial system (luminescence data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. The door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top central decorative board 455 are electrically connected in a string. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC +12 V, and ground. (GND) are input to each input connector (not shown), and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) is provided for each output to the decoration board 455 . In addition, the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 is shown on the door-frame top-center decorative board 455 that is electrically connected to the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 (that is, is located after the door-frame top-right decorative board 457). An input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. , door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decoration board 455 are input to the door frame top left decoration board 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are electrically connected in a row. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455 (that is, the rear stage of the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the final stage) has a door. Inputs (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decorative board 455, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are respectively inputted. There is only a connector for

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame secondary relay board 105 are input. Briefly describing the left side lower decorative board 402b, the left side lower decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dissipation circuit 402bc, and ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left plate decorative substrate 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left plate decorative substrate 273, and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. A sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hdLED10 and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left and a maximum current setting circuit 402bby capable of setting the maximum current to be applied to the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. A constant current is controlled to flow through hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 on the upper left decorative substrate 402a.

Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through hdLED9, hdLED10 and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, thereby dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. Also, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant-current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat-dissipating circuit 402bc of the board (left-side lower decoration board 402b) on which the constant-current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is transferred to the subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. The heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a can disperse heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx.

The constant-current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the board (left-side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted and to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board. It is Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative board 402b and the left side upper decorative board 402a is always required. The worker who performs this work must have his finger on the connector of the left side lower decoration board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration board 402a, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration board 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

As described above, the left-side upper decorative board 402a is supplied with DC +12V from the left-side lower decorative board 402b and the ground (GND). A line through which an electric current flows is input. The left-side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, as described above. As described above, the heat dissipating circuit 402ac has the function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx, and also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[10-1-3. Emission data]
The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described here. It consists of key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

[10-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, so the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the plate lower left decorative board 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through sdLED1 to sdLED6, and the maximum current to be passed through sdLED1 through sdLED6 is set. and a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[10-2-1. constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and each channel can output a current. In this embodiment, an output channel LR , LG and LB are controlled individually, thereby using three output channels. In other words, in this embodiment, one constant-current drive circuit can control the light emission mode by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs. is now possible.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section 283xi. mainly composed of

[10-2-1a. linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, +5V DC) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting DC +12V from the +12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current driving section. 283xi, and this internal power supply Verg supplies a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. is able to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. there is This is because if the +5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the +5V power supply line is used by routing electric wiring, so the length of the +5V power supply line that supplies DC +5V becomes longer, resulting in noise. easier to invade. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and DC +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not need the +5V power supply line from the power supply board 630, so that the constant current drive circuit 283x can be connected from the +12V power supply line, which has extremely high noise resistance compared to the +5V power supply line. A configuration is adopted in which the linear power supply 283xa independently generates DC +5 V as the internal power supply Vreg.

As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using it only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x toward other boards. Therefore, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, thereby contributing to prevention of flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, the need for input electric wiring and external transmission electric wiring for the +5V power supply line is eliminated, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[10-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on-reset circuit that can be initiated. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset section 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current driving section 283xi are started to operate.

The constant current drive circuit 283x, for example, does not receive a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. there is For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be extinguished. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal is independently generated as the internal reset signal RST in the reset section 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x. bottom.

Thus, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, and only within the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x is not reset by external noise, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, an input electric wiring and an external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[10-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "data line") for transmitting serial data (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. This circuit receives serial data from and shapes the waveform of a signal that conveys the serial data, and outputs the signal to the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current driving circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "clock line") for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. A clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x.

Data lines and clock lines are transmitted over a plurality of substrates and relay substrates, as described above. As a result, both the data line and the clock line are long, making it easier for noise to enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise entering the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is reduced. is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if both the data line and the clock line are long, the data line and the clock line can be formed to be resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[10-2-1d. Address setting part]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs for individual identification) of the constant current drive circuit 283x using three ID resistors (not shown). It is possible to do so.

As described above, in this embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data from software.

[10-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processor]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM section 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to obtain the gradation information that has been fetched. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM section 283xh. control to maintain the current contents of

[10-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from off to lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. In other words, the PWM unit 283xh has PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the respective gradation levels are set, these PWM gradation control sections 1 to 24 control the constant current driving section 283xi so as to flow a current corresponding to the set gradation levels.

[10-2-1g. constant current driver]
The constant current driver 283xi supplies one constant current driver (not shown) for one output channel so as to achieve the gradation set in the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh. A current driver supplies a constant current to the LED elements forming the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi has constant current drivers 1 to 24 (ie, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24, respectively.

The constant current drivers 1 to 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 9 to 16 has one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting green (G) light, which constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 17 to 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting blue (B) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element, which constitute the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line and receives DC +12V.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 1 to constant current drivers 8), respectively, so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 1 to 8, respectively. It's becoming The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 9 to constant current drivers 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 9 to 16, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 17 to constant current drivers 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 17 to 24, respectively. ing.

The constant-current drivers 1 to 8 draw a constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED, which are individually set, so that the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED are drawn. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 9 to 16 each absorb a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, thereby causing the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 17 to 24 absorb the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, respectively, so that the blue (B) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs are drawn. can emit light.

In this manner, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light from 24 LED elements, that is, from 8 full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. , it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[10-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit red (R) light, which constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Construct full-color LEDs in the eight output channels up to LG8, and the resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit green (G) light, and the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. and a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

One end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND). there is

[10-3. Decorative substrate with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decoration board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 161 and 162, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[10-3-1. Decorative substrate with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the body frame 4, as described above. Light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 as described above, and is supplied with DC +12V. GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the plate lower left decorative board 283 is connected to the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12 V, and the ground (GND) of the plate unit 200. It is input through the plate unit relay board 214 . DC +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283a) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a through heat dissipation resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the side of the door frame, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, drives the LED constant current drive circuit 283a from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is taken in, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame secondary relay board 105 is transmitted via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) to the top left decoration of the dish. DC +12V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decorative board 273 via the lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273 . As a result, noise that has entered the data line or clock line just before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is prevented from being transmitted to the succeeding board 273, which is the top left decoration board. , the waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 273c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

In addition to the plate lower left decorative board 283 and the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate lower right decorative board 288, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as the decorative boards provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. , and door frame top right decorative substrate 457 .

[10-3-2. Decoration board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. ˜hdLED 10, with heat dissipation circuit 402bc.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the body frame 4, as described above. Light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 as described above, and is supplied with DC +12V. GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12 V, and ground (GND). there is DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and also to the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements that constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one constant-current drive circuit controls the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs to change the light emission mode. can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled in light emission mode by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, while the remaining two LEDs are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. For hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board across the board on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). It is designed to control the light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 for the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 The output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current drivers 1 to 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. to LB8 (constant current drivers 17 to 24 described above).

Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively The output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, and the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to each other. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a that follows the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, red ( The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, respectively. are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver 11 to the constant current driver 15), and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively connected to the heat dissipation resistors huRb1b to Electrically connected to output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via huRb5b and heat dissipation resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in left side lower decoration board 402b. It is Output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and 10 Of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled for dimming and lighting, and the left side that follows the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled for dimming lighting.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type, and heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through eight of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 that constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402bc. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and Five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, which follows the lower side decorative board 402b, generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through them. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two of the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, to hdLED9 and hdLED10. The heat dissipation resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat dissipation circuit 402bc are in charge of the heat dissipation resistors, and are mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which constitute heat dissipation circuit 402bc in left side lower decoration substrate 402b. The heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in You can do it.

As described above, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the air, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic parts due to static electricity.

In addition to the left-side lower decorative board 402b, the decorative boards provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits include a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, a side window inner decorative portion decorative board 413, and a right side. There is a bottom decorative board 418b and a door frame top center decorative board 455. FIG.

In addition to the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a, there is a right-side upper decoration substrate 418a as a decoration substrate that does not have any LED constant current drive circuit.

[10-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are the same circuits as described above. Here, an electronic component in which a constant current drive circuit forming an LED constant current drive circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip will be described. As a type of IC package for the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. ), which is the so-called VQFN. Of the four sides of the constant current drive circuit, one side is the input side and the remaining three sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that FIG. 164 omits various electronic components and partially omits silk printing for ease of viewing the drawing.

Each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip, as described above, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. And there is. Since the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side plate formed in the shape of a vertically extending elongated strip having two LED constant current drive circuits is used. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape will be described.

[10-4-1. Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 163(a), the left side lower decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, while the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb , is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. A connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the upper left decorative board 402a is mounted on the upper edge side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame secondary relay board 105 and electrical wiring is mounted on the lower edge side of the surface 402by.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are coated with a solid white resist. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with a solid white resist to reflect light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). can be increased.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. In addition, the board control number of the left-side lower decoration board 402b is not formed as white resist characters on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b.

This is because the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged reduce the reflectance of the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

Further, the door frame left side decoration 404 shown in FIG. By moving the head (face) of the player, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and if the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404 Even if it is possible to do so, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. A region indicating the position and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player because it is not printed at all as silk printing, and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visually recognized by the player. prevent it from being done. Therefore, numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area indicating the positions where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration board 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Also, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, there are a part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown), an area indicating the position where the electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) is arranged, is not printed at all as silk printing. As a result, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN, which has absolutely nothing to do with the game for the player, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, a part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown), and a resistor (not shown) This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the position where the electronic parts such as the capacitor and the capacitor are arranged.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is printed with foil characters (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters in a pattern and removing the copper foil around them), and the foil-cut characters are formed by solidly coating the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b with a white resist. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the lower left decorative board 402b is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b instead of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. is formed on the layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed with a wiring pattern of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a character), or the left side lower decorative substrate 402b On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, foil-cut characters (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, It may also be formed as a punched character formed by punching a copper foil. Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is obtained by creating letters with foil-extracted letters (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) with a wiring pattern made of copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of being formed as solid grounding characters formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and solid grounding on the LED non-mounting surface 402by, the solid grounding is formed as solid characters on either or both surfaces of the LED mounting surface 402bx. may be

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, various dispersion Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are printed as silk-printing in the vicinity of these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 164(a)) on the left side lower decoration substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 164(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and near and above this region LSLKa by silk printing. is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 164(a)). are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 164(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. there is

On the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are printed with yellow chain lines as silk printing. (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 164(a), only the dashed lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown, respectively), and these areas are printed. Part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 above or below LSLK1 to LSLK10 (Fig. 164(a) shows part numbers LED4 and LED5 corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5). ) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

On the LED-non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (or black dashed line), and near this area, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b, there is a silk screen area indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b are to be arranged. A yellow chain line (or a black chain line), not shown, is printed as printing, and in the vicinity of this area, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are mounted. A part number corresponding to the part is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a lighting test is individually performed for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green (G) light, and LED elements that emit blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are silk-printed near the plurality of check pins (not shown). It is printed in yellow (or black). A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground that grounds the area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). A solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b and a solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). there is

As described above, the left-side lower decorative board 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically. The width from the left edge 402beg1 to the right edge 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width from the left edge to the right edge of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, if the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx will be aligned. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on that edge. Even so, it is difficult to draw out all wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the edges of the wiring patterns because there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring patterns and the spacing between the adjacent wiring patterns. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right edge of the four edges of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is the input. 162, the terminals on the input side are connected to the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left edge, upper left edge, and upper right edge are mainly the terminals of output side 1 to the output side. 162, output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2 , clock signal SCLK2) and the like. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. there is

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left side 402beg1 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the remaining two edges can be arranged such that they are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns are subject to the minimum distance dimension limitation. Also, all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is led out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in a vertically elongated strip shape.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, the group 1 composed of the four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 and the four full-color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 consisting of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the groups 1 and 2 can be routed to reduce its length. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed to Group 1 and Group 2 from becoming longer or shorter than either Group 1 or Group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern on the work.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed in the vertical central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the full-color LED hdLED6 in FIG. 163(a) is 163(a), and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged in the vertical central portion (FIG. 163(a)) of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 402bax), and can be arranged above hdLED8, which is a full-color LED formed in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant-current drive circuit 402bax to hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are eight full-color LEDs, can be secured in the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. , two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the upper left-side decorative substrate 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

In addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b in this embodiment. The resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). height: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are smaller than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) differ from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in that one longitudinal side of each of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb is the left side of the left lower decoration substrate 402b. 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2, and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the left side 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. are arranged as In other words, the edges of the constant-current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decoration substrate 402b, and the resistors They are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel.

In addition, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are arranged 45 degrees from the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate. The door-frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door-frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door-frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decoration 453, which are arranged in an inclined state and are substantially identical, are arranged in the same manner as the door. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are placed on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are separated from the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the . That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decoration substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decoration substrate. There is a mixture of what is and what is. In this embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 has 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, and another central decorative board (not shown) on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, 2nd maximum current setting circuit)) shown by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, the second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) Through two heat dissipation circuits (the first constant current circuit is the first heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistance), the second constant current circuit is the second heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistance)) The door frame top left decorative board 456 includes, in addition to its own seven full-color LEDs, another left decorative board (not shown) on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted. One LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission through one heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistor) provided in itself (not shown), and door frame top right decorative substrate 457 , in addition to its own six full-color LEDs, another right decoration board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum A current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via a single heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistor) provided therein (not shown). The other central decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is formed in the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. , and the other right decorative substrate is formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453. The other center decoration board, the other left decoration board, and the other right decoration board need to be provided with heat dissipating circuits (heat dissipating resistors) respectively. The heat dissipating circuit (here, the second heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor)) provided in the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 itself and the heat dissipating circuits of the other central decorative substrates are, as described above, provided on the door frame top central decorative substrate. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that allows Further, the heat dissipation circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other left decorative board are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself (exactly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, the heat dissipation circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other right decorative board are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself (exactly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

The edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. HDLED1 to hdLED10 are located near the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decoration board 402b when viewed from the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b. , the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged near the left edge 402beg1 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. A configuration is adopted in which they are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of the sink type, and generate heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant-current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

In addition, by arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits The edges of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right sides of the decorative board is the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the horizontal direction.

[10-4-2. Decoration board on the center of the plate]
As shown in FIG. 163(b), the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on an LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. 163(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decoration 312a). ), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, on the right side along the upper edge 314eg1, a connector HCN for connecting the operation section relay board 392 and electrical wiring is mounted.

An LED mounting surface 314x and an LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated solidly with a white resist. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are emitted forward (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the production operation unit 300). The reflectance of the film can be increased.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is not formed with the board control number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 as white resist characters.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the light emission of the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10. prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. By moving the head (face) of the player seated in the seat, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even if the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 has part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and full-color LEDs. A region indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player because it is not printed as silk printing at all, and the position where the full-color LED is arranged. This prevents the player from viewing the area indicating . Therefore, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the full-color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area indicating the positions where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

The part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are not printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as silk printing at all. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, there are a part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown), an area indicating the position where the electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) is arranged, is not printed at all as silk printing. As a result, a part number corresponding to the connector HCN, which has absolutely no relation to the game for the player, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged, a part number corresponding to an electronic part such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown), and a resistor (not shown) This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the position where the electronic parts such as the capacitor and the capacitor are arranged.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate management number of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is printed with foil characters (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut characters are formed by making characters in a pattern and removing the copper foil around them), and the foil-cut characters are formed by solidly coating the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 with a white resist. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is assigned to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. is formed in the layer (copper plane) on which the characters are formed with a wiring pattern of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters), or the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, foil-cut characters (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, It may also be formed as a punched character formed by punching a copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish is obtained by making letters with foil-cut letters (that is, letters with a copper foil wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of being formed as solid grounding characters formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid grounding surface of the LED non-mounting surface 314y, either one or both surfaces are formed as blackout characters. may be

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed on silk in the vicinity of these regions. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as printing.

In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk-printed and yellow (not shown). (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed in yellow (or , black).

On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decorative substrate 314 is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (or a black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk-printing in the vicinity of this area. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are to be arranged is silk-screened. It is printed with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown as printing, and in the vicinity of this area, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are mounted. A part number corresponding to the part is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

Furthermore, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green (G) light, and LED elements that emit blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are silk-printed near the plurality of check pins (not shown). It is printed in yellow (or black). A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground, in which areas other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors are grounded (GND). A solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decorative substrate 314 and a solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decorative substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). there is

As described above, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated band plate having a semicircular arc shape, so that the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. When viewed (that is, when the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decoration body 312a), the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 extends from the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2. is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged parallel to each other. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is extremely short, let's pull out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. Even so, it is difficult to draw out all wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the edges of the wiring patterns, because there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring patterns and the spacing between the adjacent wiring patterns. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edge sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the top edge 314eg1 and the bottom edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the lower left side of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is the input. By arranging the terminal on the input side near the upper edge 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 so as to become the side terminal, the input side terminal can be connected to the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left edge, upper right edge, and lower right edge are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side. 3, and the output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the above-described output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), etc. are output. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. there is

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the top side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314. In addition, the remaining two edges can be arranged such that they are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. As shown in FIG. As a result, from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns are subject to the minimum distance dimension limitation. Also, all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is led out from the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, of the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, group 1 consisting of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 consisting of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the groups 1 and 2 can be reduced. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed to the group 1 and the group 2 from being increased or shortened disproportionately to either the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern on the work.

163(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 is positioned above the plate center). (actually arranged along the decoration 312a), the constant current drive circuit 314ax is connected to the semicircular central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (the full-color LED in FIG. 163(b)). 163 (b ) where the full-color LED hdLED6 is arranged), and to the left of the full-color LED hLED8 which is formed in the group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. can be done. As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to hLED1 to hLED8, which are eight full-color LEDs, can be secured in the plate center decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. , an area for routing wiring patterns to hLED9 and hLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. FIG.

In addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 in this embodiment. The resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). height: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are smaller than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb, and the capacitors (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2, and one edge in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. are arranged as In other words, the edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and the resistors They are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

Further, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged near the lower edge side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and in a semicircular shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. While the constant-current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged at predetermined intervals along the plate center decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged near the top edge 314eg1 of the plate center decoration substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314. A configuration is adopted in which they are arranged on the non-LED-mounting surface 314 y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 . Like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink type as described above, and by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element, Fever. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, It is possible to make the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 less susceptible to the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx.

In addition, by arranging the land pattern edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuits The edges of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the decorative board in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right sides of the decorative board is the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. Since this can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, the large-sized effect operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the effect operation unit can be provided. A lighting effect by 300 can be performed.

[10-4-3. Metal pads on the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
IC packages for the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx on the left side lower decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the upper plate center decorative board 314 include, as described above, planar IC packages. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

A metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package is soldered to a substrate so that heat dissipation and bonding can be improved.

The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square EPad land pattern EP in addition to each lead pad. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a grid pattern. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the EPad land pattern EP and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is of the sink type, and generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. Diffusion allows heat to be dissipated from the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

Incidentally, the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly explained. The number and size of the diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so that the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit is 50% or more. As a result, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from becoming too large, and voids are prevented from occurring. It is possible to obtain a high bonding strength. Note that the EPad land pattern EP can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern. It is necessary that the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip as described above, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in a vertically elongated strip-like shape and is provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having an arc shape will be described, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged will indicate the LED by the light emission of the full-color LED. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visible to the player. A detailed explanation has been given of the fact that measures such as a decrease in reflectance have been taken to prevent this from happening. Here, other configurations of the present invention in which countermeasures such as reflectance reduction are taken (hereinafter referred to as “configurations for countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the second and third embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. A detailed description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 shows a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment, FIG. 166 shows a configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 167 is an enlarged view of the D″ part of FIG. 166 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface; 165 to 167 show the same function as the embodiment shown in FIGS. are denoted by the same reference numerals. Also, in FIG. 167, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

[Comparison between configuration for countermeasure against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to first embodiment and configuration for countermeasure against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to second embodiment]
In the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. Areas indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions of electronic components such as various distributed resistors are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are printed on silk screens near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are silk-screened. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) are printed as printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. It is

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. , and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed near these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) are printed as printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. . . . hdLED10 and corresponding part numbers, and areas indicating positions where full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged are printed as silk-printed yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. In the vicinity of the area LSLK1 to LSLK10, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, are silk-printed in yellow on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. each printed.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative board 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing. The part number to be used is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration board 402b, a region indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration board 402b are arranged is silk-printed. is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) near this area, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b are printed on silk. It is printed in yellow (not shown) as printing.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a lighting test is individually performed for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are printed in yellow (not shown) by silk-screening near the plurality of check pins. is printed with A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed in the vicinity of these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 167(a)) on the left side lower decoration substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 167(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and near and above this area LSLKa is silk-printed. is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 167(a)). are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 167(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. there is

In addition, even in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Corresponding part numbers and regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed by silkscreen printing. Specifically, regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk-printed yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. In the vicinity of the area HSLK1 to HSLK10 and on the right side, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LED1 to LED10, which are the corresponding part numbers, are printed in yellow on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. It is

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and the connector HCN is placed in the vicinity of this region. The part number to be used is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower decorative substrate 402b are to be arranged is silk-printed. is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown), and in the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor or capacitor (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is printed on silk. It is printed in yellow (not shown) as printing.

Furthermore, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are printed in yellow (not shown) by silk-screening near the plurality of check pins. is printed with A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various distributed resistors, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk-screen printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are shown as silk-screen printing in the vicinity of these areas. are printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated solidly with white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. is not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has parts corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and areas indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are provided. (yellow solid line) and are printed as silk prints, respectively, and part numbers (yellow letters and yellow ) and the areas (yellow solid lines) indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. For this reason, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing, the black-printed silk-screening allows the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. A problem arises in that the reflectance of the mounting surface is lowered, and the light emitted from the full-color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. Although formed in a translucent milky white color, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), which changes the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decoration substrates provided on various decorations provided in the game. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed. By printing in yellow, which is a bright color unlike black, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) ) and find the number that identifies the full-color LED (ie, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. By printing with , it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LED.

The configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is silk-printed, and different from black, light color (when printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

[Comparison between configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. Areas indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions of electronic components such as various distributed resistors are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are printed on silk screens near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are silk-screened. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) are printed as printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. It is

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. , and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed near these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) are printed as printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the copper foil around it ( FIG. 166(c) shows only foil-cut characters LED7 as a part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. A foil-extracted region excluding terminals and wiring patterns not shown (that is, a region formed by removing copper foil, excluding terminals and wiring patterns, in a layer (copper plane) on which wiring patterns are formed (Fig. 166(c) shows only the foil-extracted area LSLK7 as an area corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7)), and is solidly painted in white on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with the resist. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil extraction areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. Part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b as blank characters on the left side or above the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10. , the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil extraction area (that is, the wiring pattern is formed) excluding each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane) in which each terminal and wiring pattern are removed, the area formed by removing the copper foil is formed in the layer (copper plane), and in the vicinity of this area, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is attached to the foil (not shown). It is formed as a blanked character (that is, a blanked character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, there is not shown a region indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged. As a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal and wiring pattern (that is, an area formed by removing copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern) Along with being formed, in the vicinity of this area, foil-cut letters (not shown) corresponding to electronic parts (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (that is, In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the copper foil around them is removed to form characters.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a lighting test is individually performed for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are marked with foil letters (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed in the vicinity of these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 167(a)) on the left side lower decoration substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 167(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and near and above this area LSLKa is silk-printed. is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 167(a)). are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 167(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. there is

In addition, even in the configuration for countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are coated with a solid white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil character (that is, a character is formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is not shown is each terminal and the foil extraction area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) In each terminal and a region formed by removing the copper foil, except for the wiring pattern). Each character is covered. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil extraction areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. In the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and on the right side, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as letters on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. As shown in FIG. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). In the layer (copper plane) in which each terminal and wiring pattern are removed, the area formed by removing the copper foil is formed in the layer (copper plane), and in the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is attached to the foil (not shown) It is formed as a blanked character (that is, a blanked character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, there is not shown a region indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are arranged. As a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal and wiring pattern (that is, an area formed by removing copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern) Along with being formed, in the vicinity of this area, the part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are indicated by unillustrated foil characters (that is, In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the copper foil around them is removed to form characters.

Furthermore, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are marked with foil letters (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various distributed resistors, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk-screen printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are shown as silk-screen printing in the vicinity of these areas. are printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

In addition, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with a solid white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. is not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has parts corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. While the numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed with foil characters (that is, a wiring pattern in which the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is copper foil). The area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged excludes terminals and wiring patterns (not shown). It is formed as a foil-extracted area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern), and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The white resist applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx covers the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters, respectively. The part number corresponding to ~ hLED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil) In addition, the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is arranged is a foil extraction area excluding each terminal and a wiring pattern not shown (that is, a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) , a region formed by removing copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the foil removal region is formed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. and its foil-cut characters are respectively They differ in that they are covered.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. For this reason, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing, the black-printed silk-screening allows the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. A problem arises in that the reflectance of the mounting surface is lowered, and the light emitted from the full-color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. Although formed in a translucent milky white color, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), which changes the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decoration substrates provided on various decorations provided in the game. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, are formed as foil-cut characters, and the part numbers are completely unrelated to the game for the player. By forming an area indicating the position of an unrelated full-color LED as a foil-extracted area and covering the foil-extracted character and the foil-extracted area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface, the full-color The wiring pattern of the LED, the foil-free area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), are made of copper foil to make them the same color, and by covering them with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (i.e., the position where the full-color LED is placed) ), or to find the number that identifies the full-color LED (ie, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is formed as a foil-cut character, and the part number is completely different from the game for the player. By forming an area indicating the position of an unrelated full-color LED as a foil-extracted area and covering the foil-extracted character and the foil-extracted area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface, the full-color It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the LED.

The configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the process of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil-extracted area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil-extracted area) , the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with various substrates that are supplied with power from a power supply substrate and that can control illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, lines for transmitting power and lines for transmitting control signals are routed to various boards, and as the length of these lines increases, various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window that opens forward and backward with a see-through protective plate on the game board (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014] , and FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thin, and the decorative substrates accommodated in the left and right sides also become strip-shaped. In addition, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a band plate. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip plate-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

[11. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated clockwise, the more strongly the game balls B can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 to move left and right, and is released forward from the center in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because the part is located right above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the general winning opening 2001.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and will enter the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Or, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general prize winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting). , is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500 . In addition to the gate section 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this part is provided with the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 and the general winning opening 2001, and the gate section 2003 is passed with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the closed second start opening. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn are Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "variable (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short time hit", "probable short time hit", etc.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 will be in a state in which the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game ball B, game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is set for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), the game ball B The open/close pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) to close after reaching an open state that allows acceptance of the . On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the game ball B can be received. When either condition of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the game balls B cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern for the closed state (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for a "2R big win", 5 rounds for a "5R big win", and 15 rounds for a "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Reserved. The number of pending special lottery results to be held is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation. By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the display effect unit 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear By appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and various effects can also entertain the player, allowing the player to enjoy the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b or the rotation operation of the rotating operation portion 302 causes the vibration speaker 354 to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 is displayed according to the special lottery result. 2600, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. of the back unit 3000 can be used as appropriate to perform light emission production, movable production, display production, etc. The player can be entertained by various performances, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played by inserting a game medium by a player's operation, and a plurality of gauges planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area. An obstacle nail and a plurality of receiving ports (general winning port, starting port, variable winning port (variable starting port, large A winning opening, a prize winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.) are provided. When the game media are received at the receiving port, benefits (distribution of the game media, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) are provided. The operation of inserting game media can be entertained in an acceptable manner.

As this type of game machine, a plurality of game machines are arranged so as to be vertically movable between the vicinity of the upper edge and the vicinity of the center in the front-view game area, and are rotatable around an axis extending back and forth and protrude outward. has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-279548). In the technique of this document, the rotating decorative body is positioned near the upper edge in a normal state, and the rotating decorative body is lowered near the center according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. By rotating, a plurality of rotary decorative bodies are rotated in a state of protruding outward, so that the whole becomes larger, and the player can be surprised and suggested to the player that a chance will come.

However, in the technique as described in the above document, in a normal state where the rotation is stopped, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies visible to the player side protrude outward due to the rotation, so the overall size is relatively large. However, since the appearance does not change significantly, some players may quickly become bored with the effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, and may lose interest in the game due to the loss of enjoyment of the effect. rice field.

[12. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment,
As a result, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position raised near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the two first A pair of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 respectively overlaps each other two by two on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 in the first position. located in Here, a first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and a second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the right side thereof. For this reason, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a are respectively on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. is visible, and the inside of the game area 5a is decorated with a central decoration 3351 and two first projecting decorations 3352a and second projecting decorations 3353a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In a normal state, the two first protruding decorative portion 3352a and second protruding decorative portion 3353a located at the first position are overlapped in the front-rear direction. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (player side), it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that the number of the first protruding decoration part 3352a and the second protruding decoration part 3353a is the number that is currently visible. In a normal state, when the LEDs mounted on the upper front center decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board emit light, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative part 3352a, and the second Since the two protruding decorative portions 3353a can be decorated with light emission, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be used by the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decoration 3350 such as the central decoration 3351 or the like. In addition, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are at the retracted positions near the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, so that the front view game can be played. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in a good state from the player's side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

In this normal state, the upper front driving motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearing position. Then, the central decoration 3351 and the two first protrusion decorations 3352 and the second protrusion decorations 3353 descend together. At this time, on the left side of the central decoration 3351, the second protruding decoration 3353a of the second protruding decoration 3353, on the right of the central decoration 3351, on the first protruding decoration 3352a of the remaining first protruding decoration 3352, The lower ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are attached respectively, and the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Since it is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the movement direction of the central decoration 3351, it can be lowered together with the central decoration 3351. The two first projecting decorations 3352 and second projecting decorations 3353 (the first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a) move the left and right second link rods 3304 in the same direction as the central decoration 3351 moves. Pulled downward, the upper end of the second link rod 3304 slides downward relative to the unit base 3301 . The upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are vertically slidable within a range shorter than the moving distance (lifting distance) of the central decoration 3351 by the first link rod 3303. The upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 reach the lower ends in the sliding direction before 3351 reaches the appearance position of the lower end. After the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 moves further downward in the direction of the appearance position, the lower end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the appearance position further. Since it cannot move in the direction of (downward), the right side of the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 that try to descend together with the central decoration 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304 The first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a on the left side are pulled upward toward the unit base 3301 side. A first connecting rod 3352b and a second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 rotate in different directions about an axis extending forward and backward around the center of the central decorative body 3351, The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move from the first position in which they are overlapped in the front-rear direction to the second position in which the overlap in the front-rear direction is eliminated. As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, which have been seen as one on the left and right sides of the central decoration 3351, become two and rotate in a fan-like manner. Four first projecting decorations 3352a and second projecting decorations 3353a radially extending from the center decoration 3351 form one large decoration and can be shown to the player. Therefore, since all the numbers of the first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 that has moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3352a The increase in the number of protruding decorative parts 3353a can surprise the player, and the expansion of the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a around the central decorative body 3351 makes the entire decoration. can be increased, giving a strong impact to the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, when the upper front driving motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position at the rising end to the appearance position at the lowering end, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 move toward the lower ends in the sliding direction. The two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other until reaching (the downward rotation end of the tip side of the first link rod 3303). After the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central decoration 3351 moves downward in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ), the left and right two first protruding decorative parts 3352a and second protruding decorative parts 3353a rotate from the first position where they overlap each other to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and radially around the central decoration 3351. Since the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353 can show the player a movable effect of two-stage movement, the upper front drive motor 3302 By appropriately controlling the movement (effect) in the first stage, it is possible to move (effect) to the second stage, and the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can increase the variation of the movable effect, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player can hardly get bored, and the player's game can be improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, according to the game state, the upper front drive motor 3302 can move the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position at the raised end to the appearing position at the lowered end. Depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3351 descends to the appearance position when the game state changes, the player can be thrilled and entertained. Then, the upper front drive motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position to the appearing position side, and moves it to the first stage where the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 do not rotate. Since the decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward in their normal state, it seems that something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the game. Further, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the lower end, the four first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a spread radially around the central decoration 3351. Thus, the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a can show a large decoration to the player, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative part 3353a descends, the player can feel as if a sign from the heavens is given to the player, and thus an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage over the player. It is possible to make the player think that the game is going to occur, to increase the expectation for the game, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the decline of the interest in the game.

In this way, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearing position, the movements of the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353 can be changed in two stages. Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is different between when the player stops at the first stage and when the player stops at the second stage. It is possible to recognize that the second stage has a higher expected value than the first stage. Various expected values can be displayed to the player with the body 3353 .

In addition, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and by lowering the central decorative body 3351 to the appearance position, a space is secured around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorations 3352a and the second protruding decorations 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position around the central decoration 3351 at the appearing position to spread radially. The body 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 and second projecting decorations 3353 can form as large a decoration as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first projections radially spreading around it are located near the center of the game area 5a. Since the player can see the large decoration by the decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. At the same time, the central decoration body 3351 and the four first projecting decorative parts 3352a and the second projecting decorative parts 3353a can be enjoyed by the large decoration, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the central decoration 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first projecting decorations 3352a and second projecting decorations 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decoration 3351 move to the first positions. to the second position, and one upper front drive motor 3302 moves the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353, When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302, and the effect can be achieved. This load can be reduced. Therefore, when the central decoration 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 are used for the production, the other movable decorations, the light-emitting decorations, etc. can be produced at the same time. Also, since it is possible to suppress the increase in the load applied to the control of the production, the control of the production becomes unstable due to overload, so that the upper front drive motor 3302 drives the central decoration 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 And it is possible to prevent jerky movement of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and to ensure the production effect using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, as described above, while the central decorative body 3351 is descending to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since they are moved, the speed at which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a can suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351. The production using the one protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be enjoyed.

Further, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 has moved from the retracted position toward the appearing position to some extent, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the first position. It is designed to be moved from one position to a second position. That is, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are moved from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a toward the center to some extent, and then spread radially around the central decorative body 3351. position to the second position, when the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a move to the second positions, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a This makes it difficult for the portion 3353a to come into contact with other members, thereby preventing damage to the first decorative protrusion 3352a, the second decorative protrusion 3353a, and other members.

Also, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board and the second protruding decorative part decorative board are illuminated, the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be independently luminous decoration, the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the luminous decoration of the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be illuminated. The decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be conspicuous, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353 are lowered from the retracted position to the appearing position by the upper front driving motor 3302, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decoration The central decorative body 3351 and the first and second projecting decorative parts 3352a and 3353a on both the left and right sides are illuminated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the central decorative board and the second decorative board. can be made to pay attention to the central decorative body 3351 and the like. can let

Then, the upper front drive motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351 to the appearance position on the central side of the game area 5a, and the four first projecting decorative parts 3352a and the second projecting decorative parts 3353a are formed radially around the central decorative body 3351. If it spreads over a wide area, it can surprise the player and make him think that something good is going to happen, and increase the player's sense of anticipation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearing position, the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative part are connected by the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board and the second protruding decorative part decorative board. When the two-protruding decorative portion 3353a is made to emit light, the player can see the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area 5a. ”) will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be heightened to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, when the upper front drive motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351 to the appearance position in the center of the game area 5a, the center Since (a part of) the effect image is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the player can notice and pay attention to the descent of the central decorative body 3351 and the like. It can move from the first position to the second position to reveal four first protruding decorations 3352a and second protruding decorations 3353a radiating around the central decoration 3351 . Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, the large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a can be surely shown to the player, and the above-described effects can be achieved. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that reliably plays.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is placed in the area excluding the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. You can play games that are distributed. A presentation effect unit 2600 having a single transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame. The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, a predetermined LED 2630 out of a plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via a reflector 2620 is selected according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. When (one of the first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, and fourth LED group 2630d) is caused to emit light, a specific Light is applied to the light entering portion 2612 (one of the first specific light entering portion 2612a, the second specific light entering portion 2612b, the third specific light entering portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d), and the specific light entering portion 2612 The corresponding pattern 2614 (any one of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d) is displayed by light emitted from the light portion 2612 and entered into the front light guide plate 2610. The Rukoto. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted in the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and through a plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixed recess 2621, light is directed toward the specific light entrance portion 2612. Since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 through the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 so as to face the LEDs 2630, the LEDs 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light entrance portion 2612) of the light guide plate main body 2611. The light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, and the through hole 2622 can prevent the light from the LED 2630 from diffusing, thereby preventing the specific light entrance portion 2612 from not corresponding to the specific light entrance portion. The portion 2612 can be prevented from being irradiated with light.

Then, the light incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light entrance portion 2612 passes through the corresponding reflecting concave portions 2613 (first reflecting concave portion 2613a, second reflecting concave portion 2613b, third reflecting concave portion 2613c, fourth reflecting concave portion 2613d). , or ), the light irradiated in the reflecting concave portion 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflective concave portion 2613 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light reflected or refracted by the reflective concave portion 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the light guide plate main body 2611 can be seen by the reflecting recesses 2613 from the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a (the light guide plate main body 2611). The reflected or refracted light reaches in a direction perpendicular to the surface of , the reflective recesses 2613 appear to shine, and the pattern 2614 formed by the reflective recesses 2613 appears to emit light. On the other hand, the light incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light entering portion 2612 reaches the reflecting recesses 2613 that do not correspond to the specific light entering portion 2612, but the reflecting recesses 2613 that do not correspond Since it extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light entrance portion 2612 on which the light is incident, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflecting concave portion 2613 is perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. , so that the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a do not reach the eyes of the player, and the non-corresponding reflective recesses 2613 do not appear to shine. In this way, when the LED 2630 irradiates the specific light entrance portion 2612 with light, only the reflecting concave portion 2613 corresponding to the specific light entrance portion 2612 reflects or refracts the light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a can be seen, and the player can see that only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recesses 2613 is illuminated. .

Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to emit light and changing the specific light entrance portion 2612 to which light is emitted, the pattern 2614 displayed by light emission on the front light guide plate 2610 can be variously changed. The luminescent display of 2614 can surprise and amuse the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group) 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) are sequentially illuminated, a plurality of patterns (a first pattern 2614a, a second pattern 2614b, a third pattern 2614c, and a fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 for animation. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting display with movement such as .

Specifically, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are illuminated in order, and after the last fourth pattern 2614d, the first pattern 2614a returns to the beginning. If the luminous display is repeated in order from , the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 allow the player to see the luminous display that continues to move from the outside toward the center. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in a state of concentration, to make the player think that something good will happen, and to heighten the player's expectations for the game. On the other hand, on the contrary, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are illuminated in order, and after the last first pattern 2614a, the first pattern is returned to the first pattern. When the luminous display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the plurality of patterns of the light guide plate allow the player to see the luminous display that continues to move outward from the center. The player can be made to have the illusion of spreading out from the center or the illusion of moving forward, and the player can have a premonition that the game state will change. In this way, since it is possible to show the player a moving light emitting display like an animation, the moving light emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610, which has never been seen before in the pachinko machine 1, is very attractive to the player. The impact can be given, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous will occur, so that the player will not be affected by the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 attached to the center accessory 2500 in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is illuminated by the LED 2630, the light is emitted. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, and the game becomes difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful and enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 can be mounted more easily than in the conventional case where two members are used for attachment. , and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, since the LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LEDs 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be displayed. Light emission display can be reliably performed.

Furthermore, since the pattern 2614 is composed of a plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light entrance portions 2612 , the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 are arranged on the light guide plate main body 2611 . It can be arranged on a specific side (here, the upper side) of the periphery, and by arranging a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) is guided. It can be arranged only on the upper side of the light plate main body 2611 . As a result, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not enclose the outer periphery of the light guide plate body 2611, and the light guide plate body 2611 is provided with a front cover (frame body) over the entire periphery. Thus, it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind, so that the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side, and the player can see the effect image and the like. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to entertain the performance image in a good state to suppress the deterioration of interest, and to have a sense of openness by not having a frame-like partition in the game area 5a in a front view. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved to make the pachinko machine 1 attractive enough to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Further, as described above, since a plurality of (here, four) patterns 2614 can be displayed by light emission with one front light guide plate 2610, there is no need to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the conventional art, and a plurality of light guide plates can be used. The front-rear dimension of the luminous display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and since the front light-guiding plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light-guiding plate 2610 faces the player side. The position can be as close as possible, and a wide space behind the front light guide plate 2610 can be easily secured. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be placed behind the front light guide plate 2610. can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players, and in addition to the performance by the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable performance By performing movable performances by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, the upper front movable performance unit 3300, etc., various performances can be provided to the players, and the players are entertained and their interest is suppressed. be able to.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. A strong impact can be given to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist, and the player can be surprised, and the light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating due to the reflectors 2620 being visible. , the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not expect, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen to the player, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of the plurality of patterns 2614 different from each other by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be achieved. Since it is possible to show the player an effect combining these, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 The player can be entertained by the performance by and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescently displayed patterns 2614 by displaying an effect image associated with the plurality of luminescently displayed patterns 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a has an upper rear left decoration body 3220 and a left slider 3212 and a right slider 3232 which move in the vertical direction. An upper rear right decoration body 3240 and an upper rear left decoration board and an upper rear right decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and a large force acts to move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward due to gravity. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or installed on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates. is applied and the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 further acts, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of the right sliders 3232 (upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240), the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 tend to descend, and the clutch mechanism 3250 Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the output member 3253 tries to rotate, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is held between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. It will be in the biting state, and the force which will try to rotate the storage case 3251 will act with a plurality of rollers 3254 . At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 , frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 , and the housing case 3251 is pushed through the plurality of rollers 3254 . Frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the housing case 3251, preventing the housing case 3251 from rotating and locking the rotation of the output member 3253. state. In this way, output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decoration 3220 side and upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, so that the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be freely moved during transportation or installation. By moving to , it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the movement end and damaging the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and other members. In addition, the movement performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be surely enjoyed, and the deterioration of interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped from the manufacturing factory, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped in the state of the origin position, the upper rear left decoration body 3250 is operated by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be prevented from moving without permission, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be performed when installed on the island facility of the game hall. is not required, the labor required for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden required for installation can be reduced.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed or maintained, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from their regular positions (origin positions) for some reason. In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the proper positions by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 uses the tightening spring as a torque limiter on the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251. By tightening with 3255, the rotation of the output side is locked according to the rotation load, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are prevented from moving. In order to move 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240, apply a stronger force to upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240, and rotate storage case 3251 via a plurality of rollers 3254. When this force becomes larger than the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 slide against the frictional resistance, When the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates together with the storage case 3251 and becomes unlocked. Since the force is transmitted to the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, the strong force acting on the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 is transmitted to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220, the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the clutch mechanism 3250, and the like from being damaged.

In addition, according to the game state that changes by playing a game in the game area 5a, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, its rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 move to the front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 move downward from the upper part of the inside, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are lowered respectively. The player can be surprised by the lowering (appearance) of the upper rear right decoration 3240, and the player is made to pay attention to the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240. The movement and decoration of the right decorative body 3240 can be enjoyed, and the lowering of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 may bring something good to the player. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left driving motor 3214, the upper rear right driving motor 3234, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240). Therefore, vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable decorations, etc., the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the upper Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 tending to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the roller 3254, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. A force will act to rotate it. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 , frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 , and the housing case 3251 is pushed through the plurality of rollers 3254 . Frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the housing case 3251, preventing the housing case 3251 from rotating and locking the rotation of the output member 3253. state. In this way, output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decoration 3220 side and upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending freely, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and Unexpected movement (falling) of the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be prevented, and unintended movements of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 make the player feel distrustful. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the .

Furthermore, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the clutch mechanism 3250 can restrict and lock the rotation of the output member 3253, so that the left slider 3212 and Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. A player can be shown a variety of performance patterns of lifting and stopping at a position, and the player is less likely to get bored with the movable performance of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decoration body 3240 can be stopped. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and it is possible to prevent early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload. Disturbance of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be avoided to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145(d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of biasing toward the protruding portion 3252a close to each of them, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately applied. can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is locked after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until such time can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 does not give the player a sense of incongruity in the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using a storage case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, a plurality of rollers 3254, etc., two planetary gear mechanisms are provided as the clutch mechanism. , the size of the clutch mechanism 3250 can be reduced to save space for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members). The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made relatively large and conspicuous. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by strongly attracting the interest of the player.

Furthermore, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 each having the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are provided, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3230 are provided according to the game state. By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right decoration 3240 via the respective left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, the two upper rear left decorations 3220 and the upper rear right decorations 3240 play a variety of movable patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and reduce the interest in the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 each include the clutch mechanism 3250, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are provided as described above. moves smoothly, the player can enjoy the movement of the upper rear left ornament 3220 and the upper rear right ornament 3240, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the game state, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3220 Since the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be combined to form a large decoration by bringing the rear right decorations 3240 into contact with each other, a large decoration appears when they are combined. By doing so, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, " It is possible to make the player think that a "jackpot game") will occur, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other, the mutual contact causes the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to move. However, since each has a clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the force (from the output side) to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 Even if a rotating force acts, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are engaged. can be locked, movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be prevented by contact with each other, and the reaction of contact can prevent the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 from moving. It is possible to prevent the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from returning, and the movable performance of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 abutting and uniting is surely enjoyed by the player to reduce interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decoration substrate and the upper rear right decoration substrate according to the game state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made conspicuous and strongly attract the player's interest, and the decoration and movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are decorated with light, so that the player can be made to think that something good will happen. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for. In addition, since the upper rear left decoration substrate and the upper rear right decoration substrate are provided, the weight of the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increases, and the gravity force and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase. Also, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper rear left decoration substrate and the upper rear right decoration substrate can prevent the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from moving unintentionally. It is possible to make the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move as desired with a high production effect, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated to press the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force to rotate the storage case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254 , the force (torque) to rotate the storage case 3251 becomes frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255 . If it is larger than , a slip occurs between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, causing the storage case 3251 to rotate. When the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via a plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, or the upper rear left ornament 3220 and the upper rear right ornament It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 from being damaged, and it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, in the front view game area 5a, the lower central lifting base 3121 and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3151 on both left and right sides of the lower central lifting base 3121 After lowering the elevating base 3171, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body are moved by sliders or the like (slide mechanism) attached to the respective lower left side elevating base 3151 and lower right side elevating base 3171. 3173 are slid outward in the left and right direction, and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration) 3122) and the four rotating decorations 3126 aligned in the left-right direction of the central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part can be seen, and are separated from the left and right ends of the row of the four rotation decorations 3126 to the left-right both outsides. The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side effect unit 3170 can be seen at the positions, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 can be seen above them. Furthermore, an annular rotary operation portion 302 and a pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring are visible as a performance operation portion 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a. ing.

In this state, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the second 2, depending on the result of the special lottery), the four rotating decorations 3126 aligned horizontally on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 rotate, or the four rotating decorations aligned horizontally by the lower central elevating base 3121. 3126 rises together with the lower rear central decoration 3122, the four rotary decorations 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, the lower left slide driving motor of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side A pair of left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotating decorative body 3173 slides in the left and right direction by a lower right slide driving motor etc. (slide mechanism) of the production unit 3170, and the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotates, and the left side rotary decorative body 3153 and the right side rotary decorative body 3173 are raised by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The player can see a movable effect such as arranging the sub-side rotary decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 in the horizontal direction, or rotating the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention to the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126), the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, and the like. As well as being able to enjoy the movable production by them.

In addition, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned at the lower end, the lower rear central decoration 3122 is illuminated and the lower front central decoration 3111 is illuminated to display a downward arrow or elevate the lower center. By raising the base 3121 and illuminating the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 with a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration board, a large downward arrow can be illuminated, or a pair of lower left sides can be raised and lowered. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be displayed by light emission. The player can be entertained by the effect, and the player's line of sight can be guided to the downward direction of the effect operation part 301 by the illuminated downward arrow, and the player can operate the effect operation part 301. can encourage In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to participate in the player participation type effect. and entertain.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to provide various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to anticipate the performance pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected performance. can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 each extend in the horizontal direction. It rotates independently around the axis, and has four decoration parts 3127, 3154, and 3156 that are different from each other in the circumferential direction. It is possible to change the faces facing (decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156), and to change the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a in various ways to entertain the player.

Also, when the rotation of the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 are stopped, By stopping the rotation of the decoration parts 3127, 3154, and 3156 facing the player, various messages can be given as decorations to the player. Therefore, the combination of the decorative parts 3127, 3154, and 3156 that are stopped rotating may create an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous. By representing (expected value), four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left-side rotating decorations 3153 and right-side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations according to the game state. When rotating the 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the rotation stops at the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 with a higher expected value. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the lower rear center decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged vertically and capable of emitting light independently, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are caused to emit light at the same time, one light can be emitted. A downward arrow can be illuminated, and if the plurality of light emitting areas 3122a are repeatedly illuminated in order from above, the player's line of sight will be directed to the downward direction of the effect operation section 301 by the light emission that flows from top to bottom. The guidance can be facilitated, and the operation of the effect operation section 301 can be further encouraged, so that the player can reliably operate the effect operation section 301. - 特許庁

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 301 includes the circular rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring, the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be performed by the player. and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the player participation type production. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the pressing operation portion 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotating operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 is surrounded by the rotating operation portion 302, the diameter of the rotating operation portion 302 must be increased. , and the large rotary operation unit 302 can strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the light emitting display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111, the rotation operation part 302 (pressing operation part 303 ), the player can be strongly urged to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be enjoyed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation part 302, as described above, the downward arrow is displayed by the lower rear center decoration body 3122 and the lower front center decoration body 3111. When the player looks below the arrow, the rotating operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 can be seen, so that the player may be in an advantageous game state due to the rotation speed of the rotation operation part 302. At the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly encouraged, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably performed, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the person.

In addition, since the pressing operation portion 303 can be in a state of being lowered and a state of protruding upward, the pressing operation portion 303 can be seen to be large and conspicuous when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the protruding state. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility of occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous. On the other hand, since the pressing operation part 303 is not conspicuous when the pressing operation part 303 is lowered, the player can be made to think that the possibility of occurrence of an advantageous game state is low. The advance/retreat position of the can suggest the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state to the player.

In addition, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state to the player depending on the forward/backward position of the pressing operation portion 303, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front Depending on whether or not the pressing operation part 303 protrudes when the downward arrow is illuminated by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can feel nervous and excited, thereby heightening the player's sense of anticipation and performing the pressing operation. The pressing operation of the part 303 can be entertained, and the player is less likely to become bored, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided in the center of the front view game area 5a, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 Also, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 moves together with the lower rear center decoration 3122 according to the game state. By lifting the four rotating decorations 3126, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are used to move the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 together with the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration. When the body 3173 is raised, part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotary decorations 3126, the left side rotary decoration 3153, the right side rotary decoration 3173, etc. Since the player can be made to notice the rise of the four rotary decorations 3126, the left-side rotary decoration 3153, the right-side rotary decoration 3173, etc., the player can surely see the effects using them. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the effect image can be displayed in the center of the front view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side When the decoration body 3172 or the like illuminates a downward arrow to urge the player to operate the lower effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image for prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 and the effect operation unit. By displaying an effect image explaining the operation of 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, etc., the effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player. can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player-participation-type performance that operates the , and the performance operation part 301 can be easily operated, and the player-participation-type performance can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. .

In addition, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the normal lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are lowered. From this state, when the left and right side rotary decorations 3153 and right side rotary decorations 3173 are moved toward the center in the horizontal direction by means of a slide mechanism such as a lower left slide drive motor and a lower right slide drive motor, the four side by side rows are displayed. A left-side rotating decoration 3153 and a right-side rotating decoration 3173 are positioned on both left and right sides of a row of one rotating decoration 3126, resulting in four rotating decorations 3126 and a pair of left-side rotating decoration 3153 and right-side rotating decoration. Since the bodies 3173 are arranged side by side, the player can be surprised and entertained.

In this state, the four rotary decorations 3126 and the pair of left side rotary decorations 3153 and right side rotary decorations 3173 are lifted by the lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171. , four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. Since it is possible to show the player a large horizontally long decoration that traverses the game area 5a, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and I think that something good will happen. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

Four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 are arranged in an appropriate combination. In the state where they are lined up, when the rotation is stopped after rotating them, the combination of each decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, and the decoration part 3156 makes the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the rotation stops in a desired combination. It is possible to enjoy the rotation (movable performance) of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126, etc., and when the respective decorative parts 3127, etc. are stopped rotating in a desired combination, an advantageous game state is brought to the player. can be convinced of the occurrence of the game, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

After that, a downward arrow is illuminated by the lower rear center decoration 3122 (lower front center decoration 3111), the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172, thereby directing the player's line of sight downward. It is possible to guide the player to the section 301 and prompt the player to operate the effect operation section 301 .

At this time, the possibility (expected value) of an advantageous game state occurring can be suggested by the size of the downward arrow displayed in light, so if the arrow displayed in light is small, it will continue to the player It is possible to make the player think that recovery is possible by operating the performance operation part 301, and when the light-emitting arrow is small, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state will occur, so that the expectation for the game can be heightened in any case. The subsequent operation of the performance operation unit 301 can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, effects are produced based on commands from the main control board 1310 provided in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. A peripheral control board 1510 included in the performance control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided as a performance control board capable of controlling progress. This pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 148 as a ROM board and a liquid crystal output board 1530 shown in FIG. 148 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 148 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) relating to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can output to the effect display device 1600 as a display device a signal compatible with the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG.

Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as the first connectors, a special connector SCN1 plug provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 148 and a special connector provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in FIG. It is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector capable of board-to-board connection with the socket of SCN3. Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, a special connector SCN2 plug provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 148 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 in FIG. are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector capable of board-to-board connection by means of a socket of a special connector SCN4 provided in the .

Peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the performance by control information (peripheral data) read from peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output video signals to liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types of methods. . Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI system, the eDP system, and the clockless system. In this embodiment, as a system of a plurality of types of video signals, there are four systems: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system (a total of four systems). ) is adopted.

The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 148 as the same board box.

In this way, the peripheral data ROM 1520a, in which the control information (peripheral data) related to the performance based on the game specifications is stored in advance, is provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device. A board for outputting a signal conforming to the format of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated board called a liquid crystal output board 1530 which is separate from the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not modified according to the control information (peripheral data) related to the performance based on the game specifications and is not manufactured anew, Therefore, it can be configured as a common board that does not depend on the game specifications or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . As a result, there is no need to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and manufacturing only the same peripheral control board 1510 reduces costs. can contribute to Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 shown in FIG. ing. The payout device 580 includes at least a payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 105 and a payout vane 589 shown in FIG. 105 as a ball feeding rotating part. The payout motor 584 is capable of rotating its rotating shaft by a predetermined angle of 18 degrees in response to being step-driven. The payout blade 589 rotates via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. As a result, a plurality of ball receiving recesses 589b are formed at regular intervals (three are formed at regular intervals of 120 degrees) as ball receiving recesses capable of receiving and sending game balls B one by one. .

The speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is not an integer. Specifically, the speed reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (=9) of the drive gear 585/the number of teeth Z3 (=24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by mechanical calculation. The rotation angle of the delivery blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 in FIG. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588 b of the dispensing gear member 588 .

In this way, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is not an integer. The positioning position is different each time the ball is put out. As a result, since the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, the adhesion positions of tar and dust can be dispersed. In addition, if the speed reduction ratio n of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 of FIG. This ensures the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotating portion for receiving and feeding game balls is changed each time the game balls are put out, thereby dispersing the positions where the tar and dust adhere, thereby preventing tar and dust. It is possible to have a strong payout device 580 against.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the performance progresses based on the ordinary lottery result, the first special lottery result, or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. A peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 148 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the . In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 shown in FIG. 152 conductive elastic members 1545 are provided. Metal shield plate 1540 is made of metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 is made of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is formed by covering the surface of the foam 1545b shown in FIG. 152 as a core material formed of an elastic member with a conductive covering portion 1545a shown in FIG. 152 as a conductive member.

The peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically conductive. They are electrically connected via an elastic member 1545 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, which is formed of a conductive member. At the same time, the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control board 1510 can be can be reduced by using the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the back cover of the effect display device 1600 made of metal. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the game board 5 shown in FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. The game board 5 has a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 126 as a box to which the effect control unit 1500 shown in FIG. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 allows the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to flow downstream.

A performance control unit 1500 as a board box is accommodated in a space of a back box 3010 of a back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. - 特許庁The tank rail 553 is formed with a notch portion 553aa shown in FIG. 126 as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) caused by the falling game ball B can fall. When the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, an upper wall 3010a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5.例文帳に追加In this pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 can receive foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553. .

In this way, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 can receive foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553. Even if it falls from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the fallen foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign objects to the performance control unit 1500 as a board box housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 155 as power supply means capable of generating various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall outside the game machine. there is

The power supply board 630 includes FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 and D9 of FIG. , D10. On the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, silk printing TSLK9 in FIG. The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 in FIG. 155 are silk-printed so that they can be identified.

Specifically, as silk printing of FETQ5, which is a specific component, silk printing TSLK9 in FIG. 155, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are the components of FIG. Silk printed. Silk-printed TSLK9 is represented as a characteristic pattern of white oblique lines ad1 that are not present in silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8.

FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D1, D2, D9 and Even if D10 is provided on the power supply board 630, the silk-printed TSLK9 for the FETQ5, which is a specific component among the plurality of components having the same shape, is printed on the other components FETQ1, Q2, Q2, excluding this specific component. Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are silk-printed so that they can be distinguished from each other. It can be identified from Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10. Therefore, among a plurality of parts, the part of interest can be identified from the other parts.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 162. The game can be progressed based on, etc., and light emission control can be performed for 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the left side lower decoration board 402b of FIG. 162 as light emission means. As a light emission control means that can be used, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 162 and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb As a strip plate-shaped decorative substrate formed in a predetermined shape, there is provided a left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404 in FIG.

The constant-current drive circuit 402bax and the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx are formed to have a substantially rectangular planar shape, and each side of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b has a strip-like shape. They are arranged so as to be non-parallel. Specifically, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. is placed as

In this way, the strip-shaped left-side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx which are formed in a substantially rectangular planar shape. Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along both longitudinal ends of the strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, compared to the case where each side of the constant-current drive circuit 402bax and the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged parallel to both longitudinal ends of the strip-like left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, , the region sandwiched between both longitudinal ends of the strip-shaped left-side lower decorative substrate 402b and the sides of the constant-current drive circuit 402bax and the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx can be formed large. Wiring can be pulled out from each side of the constant-current drive circuit 402bax and the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx to electrically connect to ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring is drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx in the strip plate-shaped left side lower decoration substrate 402b.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 166(a) is mounted on the left side lower decoration board 402b as a light emitting means. 166(a), which has a surface 402bx and an LED non-mounting surface 402by on which no light emitting means is mounted.

The left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist as a white coating film and part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. The white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b and the entire surface of the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. In the remaining part of the foil, a wiring pattern of hdLED1 to hdLED10 is formed, in which part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are full-color LEDs. The layer is formed of copper foil and covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

In this way, numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. Covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. there is As a result, the wiring patterns of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 166(a) correspond to the numbers specifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. The part numbers LED1 to LED10) are made of copper foil to make them the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 166(a). By being covered with the resist, numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. can be difficult to find. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to see the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. can be

In addition, the white resist formed on the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b in FIG. ) can increase the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the numbers specifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 166(a), the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b in FIG. can be prevented from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 166(a) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 166(a).

[13. example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be embodied in various forms as long as they fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as a movable effect unit, a rotating decorative body 3126 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction and has a plurality (four) of decorative portions 3127 that are different from each other in the circumferential direction is arranged in the left and right direction. Although four are provided on the same axis as shown in the figure, the present invention is not limited to this, but a rotary decoration body which is rotatable around an axis extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration parts different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed. It may be provided with at least one, at least one rotatable decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending back and forth, or at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction. .

In the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but it is limited to this. Instead, a clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between a movable decoration that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decoration that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, or the like, and the drive motor.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the rollers 3254, but the clutch mechanism 3250 is not limited to this. and a speed converter for transmitting the reduced rotation to the output side. a first planetary gear mechanism having a non-rotatable fixed ring gear and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear coupled to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear; , between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a carrier provided with support shafts for supporting each is arranged on both sides, and in the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a ring At least one of the gear and the sun gear may be provided with a difference in the number of teeth so that the rotation from the driving motor is reduced and transmitted to the rotating ring gear.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 plugs, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the special connector SCN3 socket, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the special connector SCN4 socket. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a socket) that serves as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector (or a socket that serves as a plug). a special connector) can be provided. In the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal formats to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, if the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, it becomes a special connector (or a plug). special connector).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded. They may be made of resin and molded in an opaque black color. Alternatively, if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin, they may be molded in a translucent color. may have been Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board can be mounted on the rear surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. are fixed with metal pan head screws so that the ground (GND) of these various boards becomes the circuit ground as described above. Can be configured. As a result, the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be flowed to the ground (GND) of various substrates as a circuit ground, thereby removing the noise.

In the above-described embodiment, the delivery blade 589 has three arc-shaped blade pieces 589a that extend outward in a flat plate shape and are spaced at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. may be provided at four angular intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 168 is a modification of the dispensing device, and is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device provided with a dispensing vane 589 having four arcuate vane pieces 589a and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 168 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction, and the same reference numerals as in FIG. 105 are attached. When the delivery blade 589 is provided with four blade pieces 589a each having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 588b are provided at four angular intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90-degree area of the dispensing gear member 588 in the circumferential direction and the 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed are used as the light shielding range. It is managed by 18 steps of rotation including 9 steps rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 and 9 step rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 45 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. , the speed reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps for the payout of one game ball B. As shown in FIG. In other words, when the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes the payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591 . The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect the passage of the game ball B, but if affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes. In spite of this, it is possible to make it look like a state in which the game ball B does not pass due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines, based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, that the payout of the game ball B is not completed, and the payout motor A large amount of game balls B are put out by controlling the rotating shaft of 584 to rotate excessively. In order to detect such a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring a game ball B (referred to as "radio wave goto"), as shown in FIG. It can be configured to be provided in The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, and when the payout control board 633 determines based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 that an abnormal radio wave is emitted, Along with emergency stop of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, to transmit to the main control board 1310 a radio-controlled goto notification command to that effect. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio-wave goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 . When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit width electric wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the electric wave goto notification command is set to 8-bit width to 16-bit width, and the electric wave goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. The information is transmitted from various speakers, and various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a red flashing light emission mode) to notify the radio-controlled goto. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio-controlled goto notification command having a 16-bit width, it displays a large message "Abnormality has occurred." do.

Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passage sensor 594', which is a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch, may be used. A detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594' is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 receives the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of put out game balls B does not match, it can be determined that some kind of dishonesty has been committed. When the payout control board 633 determines that some kind of fraud has been done, it urgently stops the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to the main control board 1310 to notify that effect. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 . When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit width goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the goto notification command is set from 8-bit width to 16-bit width, the goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume, and the sound is output from various speakers. At the same time, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a red blinking light emission mode), and the content is shaped so that it is possible to notify a goto, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a goto notification command having a 16-bit width, it displays a large message "Abnormality has occurred" on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs in a warning notification light emission mode. .

Also, in the above-described embodiment, the dispensing motor 584 was a stepping motor, but it may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotary shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle of 18 degrees accordingly. That is, the DC motor rotates its axis of rotation by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmission member. , decelerates and rotates the dispensing blade 589, but rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (eg, the first transmission gear 586', The speed may be increased via the second transmission gear 587 ′ and the dispensing gear 588 a ′) of the dispensing gear member 588 so that the dispensing blade 589 can be rotated. By doing this, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout vane 589 is determined in advance so that the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is not an integer. The positioning position is different every time one ball is put out. As a result, since the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, the adhesion positions of tar and dust can be dispersed. In addition, if the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light shielding pieces) of a payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotating shaft of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. This ensures the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is predetermined, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 for receiving and sending out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is put out to prevent tar and dust. By dispersing the positions where the dust adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against tar, dust, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, a predetermined gap is formed between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces. One space is a first predetermined height distance dimension (this embodiment 12 mm), and a second predetermined height distance dimension (in this embodiment, 1.6 mm) and a second space 1505b. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. A case where a large movable production unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production object, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, and in the depth direction If there is a margin in the distance dimension of , the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension of the predetermined height, or the second may be configured such that the distance dimension of the predetermined height is larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a. By not accommodating various electronic components that emit heat, the heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540d is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, The part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a , and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN3) It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area, or to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the larger area. 1530, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or a combination thereof. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover side wall 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, thereby contributing to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. FIG. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side were formed with the ventilation holes 1501az, through the ventilation holes 1501az, Foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the ball passage in which the game ball B rolls may be formed with a cutout portion, a hole, or a groove similar to the cutout portion 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. A notch, hole or groove can be formed in the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are arranged. , the board unit 620 has the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. 111, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570 . Therefore, an eaves-like member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves formed in the blade rotation detection sensor 590 and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be staggered, or both can be adopted. It can also be configured as Also, along the upper sides of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured by protruding. and , can be shifted, or both can be employed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power breaker circuit 630g are provided on a single power supply board 630. , various electronic parts and the like are provided, but it is also possible to provide them separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply substrate 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power breakdown circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. When input to the connector B, it is input to the rectifier circuit 630c, is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will happen. Various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc. generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. be.

In the above-described embodiment, the power supply breaking circuit 630g is composed of FET Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and capacitor C22. When input to the gate terminal of , FETQ5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 become overcurrent), and FETQ5 is destroyed. Thus, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are electrically connected is maintained, but it may be constructed by a surge absorber or a thermistor. FIG. 169 is a circuit diagram for explaining an outline of a modification of the circuit configuration of the power supply board. In FIG. 169, components having the same functions as shown in FIG. 155 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In the configuration of the noise countermeasure circuit 630b shown in FIG. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. AC24V1 and AC24V2, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. They are respectively output from the cathode terminals and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. 155 is composed of FET Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and capacitor C22, as described above.

Also, in the configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 155, as described above, when the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through the power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via the . For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as shown in FIG. 159(b), a white outline and a solid white area ad2 within the outline are silk printed. , 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 . That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Further, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown). The region ad2 is visible, and the solid white region ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the region inside the white outline, is transparent. Visual observation is ensured through a transparent glass tube.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 169, when the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through the power line (not shown), the L side is connected to the fuse FUSE1. is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the , and its N side is input to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. For the fuse FUSE1, as shown in FIG. 159(b), a white outline and a solid white area ad2 within the outline are silk-printed, and a silk-printed FSLK2 is a power supply substrate 630. printed on the mounting surface of the That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Further, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown). can be seen, and the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1, which is the inner area of the white outline, and the corresponding solid white area ad2 is the transparent glass tube. It is designed so that it can be reliably viewed through. In addition, in the configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 155, AC24V from the island facility of the game hall was input to both power supply lines (L side, N side) through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. In the tests conducted, no problem occurred even if one side (N side) was omitted. Therefore, in the configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. can be omitted and input to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is, so that the cost can be reduced. On the other hand, regarding the power switch 630a in the configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. This is the same as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the power supply board 630 described above, and has a configuration that can simultaneously disconnect/connect.

In addition, in the configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 169, between the N side of the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a, one of the microgap type arresters AL1 is electrically connected. It is connected to the. The other end of the microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5. The microgap type arrester AL1 sends the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") enters the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall due to a lightning strike. Surge voltage is limited by flowing current to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 687, and a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning ON/OFF the power switch 630a is prevented from being applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing a surge current through the frame ground FG2 so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. Also, the micro-gap type arrester AL1 is installed in a game hall by an operator who mistakenly installs the ground terminal ECN2 (island facility ground) of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102(b). and the ground connection terminal of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire, as collateral, electromagnetic noise is guided to the N side of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall. Noise resistance can be improved by removing the

Furthermore, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure circuit 630b shown in FIG. In addition, it is composed of a surge absorber SA1 constituting a power supply breaking circuit 630g', and the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power supply breaking circuit 630g'. , and is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power breakdown circuit 630g' has a faster response speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, surge absorber SA1 A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned.), one end of which is electrically connected to AC 24V1 through a power switch 630a, and the other end is electrically connected to AC 24V2 through a power switch 630a. When a circuit voltage exceeding the voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and the device is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode. Rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used. A silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage that rises more rapidly than a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a pn junction of silicon. This silicon surge absorber is characterized by very quick response to surges, excellent control voltage characteristics, and very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type should be used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, should be selected.

The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance decreases as the temperature rises. When the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows through the thermistor TH1, current begins to flow as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. Using this function, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and the power supply voltage of AC 100V which is higher than the power supply voltage for game machines is AC 100V. If it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) before the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, causing a large current to flow through the surge absorber SA1. The surge absorber SA1 is destroyed and enters the short mode. In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode state in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is closed. It will be fused. In addition, since the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Can prevent being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 other than the power board 630 is destroyed. can be reliably prevented.

As a result, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 provided in the power supply generation circuit 630f shown in FIG. Since the GATE terminal and the CGND terminal for applying a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 do not have to be provided in the power generation circuit 630f' shown in FIG. 169, the circuit configuration of the power generation circuit 630f' does not become complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 which is inserted and constitutes the power destruction circuit 630g' is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced and the plug of the power cord is connected to the AC24V power outlet which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall. , the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. FUSE1 will be blown again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has not been destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of AC24V which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facilities of the game hall, the game cannot be started. In addition to adopting this aspect, the power supply board 630 in the above-described embodiment can be divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuits of the first power supply board 630A include the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B, which is mainly composed of the connector A, includes the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the thermistor TH1, the choke coil L2, and the fuse shown in FIG. The FUSE 3 and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc. generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. be.

According to the pachinko machine 1 adopting this aspect (configuration of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 169), various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 and the 169 is provided as power supply means for supplying power to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, etc.). 169 as a fuse, a surge absorber SA1 in FIG. 169 as a surge voltage absorbing element, a rectifying circuit 630c in FIG. 169 as a rectifying circuit, and a power generation circuit 630f' in FIG. there is The fuse FUSE1 can receive an AC power supply from the island equipment of the game hall as an external part of the game machine. The surge absorber SA1 is capable of absorbing a surge voltage of an AC power input through the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify AC power input via the surge absorber SA1 into DC power. The power generation circuit 630f' can supply power to various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 based on the DC power input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

The surge absorber SA1 receives a commercial AC power supply having a higher voltage than the gaming machine power supply voltage (AC24V) as an AC power supply from the island equipment of the game hall, and a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) through a fuse FUSE1. When the surge voltage is input, the surge voltage exceeds the allowable voltage and is destroyed, resulting in a short-circuit state, and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 to form a circuit that melts the fuse FUSE1.

Thus, when the commercial power supply voltage (100V AC) having a higher voltage than the power supply voltage for game machines (24V AC) is input to the surge absorber SA1 via the fuse FUSE1 as the AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall, the surge voltage is generated. is broken by exceeding the allowable voltage, a short circuit occurs, and a circuit is formed in which a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 to melt the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100V), the power supply board 630 will not be destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 from being destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed when the commercial power supply voltage (100V AC) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines (24V AC) is supplied.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with power supply means for generating various power sources based on the power source from the game island equipment and supplying them to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038] )). The game island facility converts a commercial AC power supply (AC100V) into a stepped-down AC power supply for game machines (AC24V). However, if the power cord for supplying power from the island facility to the game machine is inserted into the power outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the power outlet of the AC power supply for the game machine, the commercial AC power supply will be stronger than the AC power supply for the game machine. Since it has a high voltage, there is a risk that an abnormal power supply will be output from the power supply means and various boards inside the game machine will be destroyed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. , the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are arranged in an inclined state of 45 degrees. , the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, but it can also be applied to an elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided on the game board 5. FIG. As the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, for example, in addition to the decorative substrates provided in the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, and the upper front movable production unit 3300, the performance shown in FIG. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 in the output unit 2600 can be mentioned.

In the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls light emission by passing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, and other monochromatic LEDs. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control light emission of a maximum of 24 monochromatic LEDs.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 was input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V) created by the provided linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 161) is used for lighting the LED within the allowable current range of the linear power supply. can be used as the voltage of For example, for one of the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, maximum one single color LED (for example, LEDs excluding red LEDs) are electrically connected, the anode terminal of the single-color LED is configured to receive an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) generated by a linear power supply, and the single-color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipating resistor of the heat dissipating resistor circuit described above. Further, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, red LED) are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipating resistance of the heat dissipating resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured in this manner can be applied to a decorative board provided on the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3 .

In the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. -LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED is electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipation resistance of the heat dissipation resistance circuit described above. However, multiple full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series for one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two to three. If it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the DC +35V from the power supply board 630 is used as the LED lighting voltage instead of the DC +12V from the power supply board 630. You may The decorative board configured in this manner can be applied to a decorative board provided on the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 of the door frame top decoration 453 are the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455. When the frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decoration 453, the width dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the decoration substrates is large. The edges of the land pattern are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. For any one decoration substrate or any two of the frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit The sides may be arranged so as not to be parallel to the top side and bottom side of the decoration substrate. Then, the door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full-color LEDs provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456, in addition to its own full-color LED, directly drives another left decorative board on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, by its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are coated with a solid white resist, but instead of this, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates with white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed as silk printing. Each will be printed in yellow (or black).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative substrates provided for each decoration provided on the door frame 3, such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, etc. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates were printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, respectively, but the mounting position of the full-color LED (That is, when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as silk printing), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the full-color LED It may be configured to specify the mounting direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and gaming machines other than the pachinko machine, such as a slot machine (rotary type). game machine) or a fusion game machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a slot machine (plays a slot game using game balls). Here, a slot machine as a reel-type game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door 6002 and a main body 6004, as shown in FIG. Front door 6002 and body portion 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise around this hinge.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002 , and a projecting portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004 .

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002 .

On these variable rotating bodies, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine, 2... Outer frame, 3... Door frame, 4... Main body frame, 5... Game board, 5a... Game area, 558... External terminal plate, 559... Frame ground board, 560... Payout unit, 570... Ball Induction unit 580 Dispensing device 580a Dispensing passage 580b Ball extraction passage 581 Dispensing device body 582 Dispensing device rear lid 583 Dispensing device front lid 584 Dispensing motor 585 Driving gear 586 First transmission gear 587 Second transmission gear 588 Delivery gear member 588a Delivery gear 588b Detection piece 589 Delivery blade 589a Blade piece 589b Sphere housing 590 Blade rotation detection Sensor 591 Dispensing detection sensor 592 Ball extracting movable piece 593 Ball extracting lever 600 Upper full ball path unit 610 Lower full full ball path unit 630 Power board 630a Power switch 630b 630 c rectifier circuit 630 d power factor improvement circuit 630 e smoothing circuit 630 f power generation circuit 630 g power supply breaker circuit 633 payout control board 1300 main control unit 1310 main Control board 1500 Production control unit 1501 Cover body 1502 Base body 1503 Wiring cover body 1510 Peripheral control board 1520 Peripheral data ROM board 1530 Liquid crystal output board 1540 Shield plate 1545 . . . Conductive elastic member 1600 .

Claims (2)

a storage unit provided in the upper part of the back side of the game machine and having a storage area capable of storing game balls supplied from the island facility;
A predetermined ball payout device is provided on the right side of the storage area when viewed from the back of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the storage area pass through a rear guide path behind the game machine from the storage section. a tank rail part that can be guided in a direction to be
an inclined portion located outside the storage area and above the tank rail portion;
The inclined portion is provided integrally with a member constituting the storage portion, and the upper surface is inclined so that a game ball positioned on the upper surface of the inclined portion can flow into the tank rail portion due to a predetermined event. It is considered to be a face,
The inclined surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction in which the rear guide path is located, not in the direction in which the storage area is located, so that game balls flowing down the inclined surface do not flow into the storage area. become,
Furthermore, the inclined surface has a surface inclined downward from the front side to the rear side of the game machine,
Furthermore, the downstream end of the inclined surface is open without a vertical wall so that the game ball that has flowed down the inclined surface does not stay.
A gaming machine characterized by: a storage unit provided in the upper part of the back side of the game machine and having a storage area capable of storing game balls supplied from the island facility;
A predetermined payout device is provided on the right side of the storage area when viewed from the back of the gaming machine, and guides game balls stored in the storage area through a rear guidance path behind the gaming machine from the storage unit. a tank rail portion that can be guided in the direction of
an inclined portion located outside the storage area and above the tank rail portion;
The inclined portion is provided integrally with a member constituting the storage portion, and the upper surface is inclined so that a game ball positioned on the upper surface of the inclined portion can flow into the tank rail portion due to a predetermined event. It is considered to be a face,
A regulating wall is provided on the left side of the inclined portion in a rear view of the gaming machine for regulating the inflow of game balls into the storage area so that the game balls flowing down the inclined surface do not flow into the storage area,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is characterized in that the inclined surface has a surface that slopes down from the front side to the rear side of the gaming machine.

Images